.I
1223
. 036
1912
SMC
A GIçAIII.\R OF 0I.I) llISl
A GRAVI IAR
OF
OLD
IRIStt
R:v. F. \V. O'CONNKLL, I.A., B.D.
FELLOXXSIIIP I'RIZEMANI CLASSIC.kL AND SEMITIC I'tIILOLO(IY
TIIN[TY COLLE(:E DUBLIN ;
I.ECURKR IN THle CELTIC LANGUAGE AND LITERATUIRE IN" OEII]]
QUEEN'S CNIVliSITY (tF BELFAST.
BELFAST :
MAYNE, BOYI & SON, 1,TI)
1912.
(_'OLLF:II SANI'TAE ET INDI'IDYAE TRINITATIS SO(;'IO
STX'I»IIS LITTE.XR'3[ PRAE'(}SlTX'S
I'ATRIAE A3I}RE [N{'ES'N
LINGVAM NOSTRAM
AI: }I:I.IX'IONE IW}3IINX'I IN DIGN[TATEM I'IIISTINAM
PR}P';NATOR INDEFEss'S
X:IN DIç'AIT.
vii
PREFACE.
TiiURNEY,SEN'S H.dbnch de.' Alt-Irische is destined to
relmtiu, for many years to corne, the studard grammar of
Old Irish. Ulffortulmtcly it is a sealcd hook to the lmjority
of our h-ish studcnts who are hot ac,luaintcd with thc
(,ci lllall language, altl couseqtlCnt]y the want of a gl'almUal"
iii English has 1,een felt in many ,luarters. Silme it is a l,art
of luy duties at this Ulfiversity to deliver two lectures on
Ohl lrish GralmUm" weekly dul'ilg Terre, I undertook a
year ago to l,roduce a gralnmar which should at least prove
useful as a book of reference, and after malW distractious I
have completed it. ]t has proved by no means au easy task to
COml,ress the iluportalt fitcts of Old h'ish gramluar, together
with the ildisl,ensahlc iltdices, within the prcscribed liluits
of about two lmlldl'ed pages, and lin Olm can be more keeldy
conscious of the preseut work's defects than the author--
but i.s. leov 6 JIh6v a db.he«dl.
My best thanks are due, in the fil'st l,lace, to Dr. Rudolf
Tlmrlmysen for his kind permission to make use of his
Handbuch and to adopt some of his classifications in the
hope of winning for them general recognition. I may here
express also my indebtedness to Zcuss' Gr««mmatica Celtica,
Pedersen's lvgle&hende Gvammatik clef AItischet
Sprachen and Aspir(tt&»wn i Ivsk, Vendry(s' Grammaire
du cieil ivl, ndai., Sarauw's Ir'ke Stud&r, Strachan's Old
L'i«h P(tvadigm« and Select&n.' ri'oto the Gloses, the
The..at«vns P«daeohfbcrnicu., and numel'oUs articles in the
Rewte Celtique, Zeit.«hvtft fiiv Celti.she Philolog&, and
viii
/5"iu. My tlmnks are also due t.o Professor O. ,l. Bergin
of the Nation:d University, Mr. E. J. Gwynu, F.T.C.I).,
Mr. Walter J. l'urtou, and to my colleagues l'rofessor I:.
3I. tIenry an(] Mr. A. O. 13elour for rea.ding proofs and
for many va.luahlc suggestions; further to the Fiua.nee
Committee of this Univcrsity for a grant in aid of
pul,lica.tion : an(t lastly to 3h'. John Boyd of the firm of
3la)me & Boyd for the eourteous interest whieh he bas
displa.yed and the eaveful supervision which he has exereised
in the 1,rodu«'tion of thc work.
To the scholar I apologise for the liberties [ have taken
in thc translitcration of Sanskrit words, esl,ceiMly lu the
mattcr of Visarga, lmt [ di,1 hot cmsider that they oecurred
so frequently as to wavraut thc cxpensc of lWocuriug special
type.
The Appcmlix contaiuiug grammatical terres [ hve
;t(lded in m'der fo show lrish stndeuts who are imerestcd lu
the preservati,n ;tud dcvclopmcut of the Mdcr ]angnage
how, by a l,roccss partly of I)oldly borrowing, partly of as
1,oldly tra.slating, out nnccstors overcamc thc dilticulty of
new technical terres.
In conclusion lct roc direct the studeut's attention to the
list of Corrigenda and rcqucst, him to [ollow the advice of
the ohl glossttor' coc, vt '
FEAltI)()RCIIA UA CONAILL.
QUEE' UI[\ERSITY, |ELFA,'ST.
:lid,'hi ]';ilc l'df{_icc, 1DI.'.
ix
SUBJECT INDEX.
[The refeFt'Flct's are to laragraphs.]
Abstracts, formation of, 65.
Ad.iectivcs, (,,rmati, m of, 67 : declcnsiou of, 68-72 : compariou «,f,
73 75 ; irt'cgulav COmlmrison of, 76.
Atlvcrlm, 7S, 9li, 256. 257.
Article, 42. 43 ; with dcmonstrativcs, 45, 46,
Aspir«tion, 9, l-t: 1.ss of, 17.
(a.'cs, uscs of, 66.
C,,mpesatory Leugthcning, 25.
('oml«muds ,)f .hi, 21"2.
('onjm,cti ris, "' -")--
C«msonants. double., lS: qualily of, 19: gr.ups of. 1 ; ,rigiual initial
aml final, 2[ ; loss of, 25 ; ovigin of, 41.
Çolmla , 203-2[ l.
Dt.paltalizati«n, 22.
Dimhmtivc, fl»rmatim-f,
I )[phthongs, 34.
Flcxiu, ahsolu and coujunct, 11 [ ; modes .f,
Fra(.ti-ns,
Future, store, 13[ ;.tfuturc, 132, 133: t-future, [5; s-future,
prvtcritc, 134; asigmativ, 135: rcduplic,t.d, 135:
1 IV.. 135 ; fin-ms without rcduidicati,m, 137 ; reduplicated
.,-future, 138 ; l)rctcritc, 13!.
cmhmtion, lfi.
Ili«lcs, 32, 33.
Impcrative, 124. 125.
Iu(licativc, present, l l: prenent deponeut. 120: prvsent passive.
1"2"2 : imwrfcct, 123.
Interrogative l'articles, «.,
Lcnition. 9. 14.
Loa n-w«»rd, 258 26 l.
Metathcsis, 26.
x
Ns;dizat i«»n, 15.
Nega(ives 101.
Noum 47 : deeIensi-n »f, 49 ;4 : irregular dt.clensi«m of.
N,mn St.ems, v,»edic, 48 : eousoumt:fl, 5ï.
Nmuenfls, ïg, 80 numend substantives, SI.
Orth.gral»hY. 4, 8.
Pu'ti«-iple, ImS passive, 17.3 ; .f ncccssity, 153.
Prelmsiti.ns , 215
['re$erite, sgcm. 140: S-lU'¢'$erite, 141, 14; /-pretcrite. 143, 144:
sulfixlcss, 145 : rcduplicatcd, 145, 14i : irrcgulm rcduplieati«
147: tmredul»licated, 14S: irrcgulrr mrcdul»licated, 149.
15 : passive prescrite stem. 151.
['rcvcrhs, 102.
l'mclitics, vovalism of. 41t.
i.lixed, $5: alfixed, Sri: sultixed, ST; sulfixed t. l»rep,»siti«ms,
N8 9o: intcrr,,gtie, 91 : dem.mstrative. 93: indelinite.
Prommciati,m, 4, S.
Quality, 19 ; change of, 20 : eonfusit»n t»f, 23.
Relative, how exl»rcssu. 9; leniting relative sentenues.
nasalizing. 90: genitivc of, I00.
llo, ot" I)ossihility, 103; uses of, 11t: l»»siti.n of, litS.
Self, 9 l.
Strmg Vcrbs, paradin of. llft Il{; : table of, page
Snhjmtctive. store, 12t;: a-subjmctivc, 126 12S: -suhjunc[ive,
126, 19, 130.
Syneopation, 3ï.
Tense-stems, 109.
V¢rhal nomes, 151.
Vcrl)s, 1i}8 ; strong and weak, 1 Il) : nmnhcr and pcrson, I I 1 : relative
f.rms. 11: classifieati.n of, 115: pcrsonal cmlings, 113, 117.
119, 121, I2l ; of existence. 13 ; dcfecçive,
Vovels, in aecented syllables, 2 ; in nmrccentcd syllables, 35
unaccented in cl«»sed syllables, 36: dcvelpment of new.
vovel-eontracçion, 39.
SVeak Vcrhs, para[igm of, 155-175.
xi
TABLE OF (gRAMMATICAL TERM.n AND YMP.OLS.
Aulaut = the initial som,d of a word.
Al»solute anlaut = the initial sound of a word unatlçcted by
a preceding souud.
Inlaut =a souud occurring in thc interior of a
word or syllable.
Auslant = the final sound of a word.
Ablaut = variation of the root-vowel.
Sh'va =thc Hcbrew naine of the obscure unac-
cented vowel like e in Eng. bcgin,
Proto-Kcltie = thc Keltic language belote its division into
the Gadelic and Ih-itmmic lwanchcs.
Ih'ototonic = accented on thc first sllable.
Deutcrotonic = accented on thc second syllablc.
< = redueed from. > = redueêd to.
denotes a hypothetical form. In the paradigms of the
vcrbs, forms in parentheses are such as do hot occur but
may be safely deduced.
l'rototonic verbal forms are denoted by a point prefixed
thus-/wad.
Bret.
Goth.
Gk.
Dot. Gk.
Id.-G.
Lat.
O. Lat.
Med. I,at.
Lett.
Lith.
ABBREVIATIONS.
= Armelfian.
-=- Breçon.
-- Gothic.
= Greek
= Doric Grcek.
= Indo-Gêrmanic.
= Latin.
= Old Latin.
= Medieval Latin.
= LettM.
= Lithuanian"
BI« of Arm.
(}.il.G. = Old High Gernmn.
O. SI. = Old Slavonic.
Skr. = Sanskrit.
W. = Welsh.
Ml. = Milan Glosses.
S.G. = St. Gall Glosscs.
Tur. = Turin Glosses.
Wh. = Wiirzburg Glosses.
L.U. = Lebor ha h-Uidri.
Hh. = Handbuch.
Thurn. = Thurneyseu.
= Book of Armagh.
= Vergleichende Grammatik.
xii
('ORR I 1 EN I A.
l':tge 7 line 17 fol'.led read f[ad
30 ,, 21 ,, -fli-stelns ,, Ça- (ê-) stems
" 33 5 ,, mM,'e ,, mulet
' ' IIost'
37 26 ,, host' ,,
,, 37 ,, 27 l';l'iu ,,
,, 40 ,, 26 ,, of ,lesus ,, of [.u Jesus.
,, 45 ,, ll.12 ,, e.q. ,, eq.
,, 45 ,, ")7, 33 ,, jiriSm &-c. ,, fh'idn, &c.
46 ,, 36, 37 ,, vo" co
47 1 ,, nasalization ,, lenition
57 ,, 30 ,, n. side, 1,1. sidi ,, ri. side, pl..idi
,. 58 ,, 211
63 ,, "2 ,, «oïnl«t«]ttnav ,,
INTRODUCTION.
Old Irish may be divided into three stages as follows :--
First Stage, represented by many Ogham inscriptions
and a few early inscriptions in the Roman character. The
chier clmracteristic of this stage is the retcntiçm of some of
the original e«se endiugs, e.g. muqi (int,'ci), inigeu, Erciu.
Second Stage, reln'esenicd by later iuscriptions in the
loman ehar«teter, the l)rim«« m«m.' of the Wfirzlmrg
I:losscs, the Cml)rai Homily, the Tnrin l)alimpsest, the
Uodiccs Philargyrii, and the h'ish names recordcd in the
llook of Armagh by Muirchu maccu Macthéni and T/re-
chin, and iu Adamnan's 17fa Col«»bae. This stage is
charactcrizcd by the preservatiou of long d and 5, of tle
truc (lildthongs 6 aud d[, of unacccutcd Y and 6 letwcen
non-palatal cousonants, of pretonic to (lu) in verbs, of i
a«l e aftcr non-palatal consonants, and of -o in gen. shlg.
of-[-and ce-stems, e.g. Cërm, F¢cc, .oo., ood, L6ig,ire,
05gn,, B(iit«h, 6ih'hd, Aclcd, 6('lter, cdo«lt, tuthégot,
to»cova, Capl[t, uvgit, Ail«llo, br5tho.
Third Stag. rcprcscnted by the rest of the Viirzburg
and othcr Continental Glosses : pieces of Ohl Irish prose in the
Book of Armagh, Lcbor ha h-Uidre and other MSS.: Old h'ish
l,ocms ai St. G«dl, Milan, aud St. Paul's KIoster, Crinthia;
F:lh'c Ocngusso, and the Irish Hymns in the I.iber tlym-
norum. In the langnage of this stage é and 5 h:tve 1)ccome
[(« and «a, ol and u[ arc written oe and ae, ê and 6 in
mmcccnted syllables > a, i and e after no»palatal con-
sonants are written ai (i) and ac, pretonic fo (tu) > do
(d), ad -o in gen. sing. of -[- and -u- stems > a; e.g.
Ci«n'an, stas, LocgMre, Bet«b, A«ld, edaclt, do-
thh«g«t, avgait, brdtha. The vcrlal fol'm t,th¢got (2nd
stage) contains thvee ahaisms in as nmny syllables, riz.
tn- (later do-, dt-), -thég- (latcr -tli[(«g-), -or (later ««/), I,re-
historic Irish =
As the First Stage is represented merely by inscriptions
composcd of proper names linked togethcr by means of
m(«q[ or avi, and as the Second Stage is 1,ractically confined
to proper names or glosses consisting of shglc wmls, Old
h-ish grammar d'aws its matcrial chiefiy from the Third
Stage. The forms dcalt with in the present wm'k are mainly
those which occur in the Tlesauvis
Thc total pcriod covered by the three stages is, muglfly,
fmm the fifth to the tenth century.
I.--PHONOLOGY.
1. Tbe cumbersome Oglmm all,habet, itself I)ased on
the Latin all)habet, witb its curions system of easily con-
fused «lots and strokes (in ft it resembled a signa.llh)g
code rather than an alphabct), was soou abandoned in
favom" of the Roman. The latter, although more con-
vcnieut for literary purposcs, was far from being a 1)erfect
medium for the representation of Irish sounds, the rcsult
being that one letter frequently reprcsented two distinct
somds, so that a sentence in Old Irish is ahnost as i)wom-
plete orthographcally as a sentence in unpohted Hebrew.
2. The letters k, y, aud z only occur in forcign words,
e.g. pr[d krtlde (p'[die kaleda.), ymmo (hymnum),
baitzisi (from b«tptizo); q is fomd in loan words as
aeqttinocltt qttnt't-, and also in Irish .ti.¢qtte (l)robably afte"
the mmlogy of Lat. tsque); x is sometimes used for ch.%
e.g. oxalib from oclts(tl = («xillet, fo.ced as well as fochsal.
3, h represented no sound, although a geminc h-sound
existed in Ohl h'ish. Its principal uses seem to have
been (a) to We greater substauce to monosyllahles con-
sisting of only one or two letters, e.g. hi, h5, hé, hed, for
i, 6, é, ed ; (b) in such words as huile, hui.se to prevent the
Latin prommciation vile, v¢se ; (c) to mark hiatus in cases
like Is'ahel, ro-htcad, rele, ch, lb, plt were used to repre-
sent the sl,irmts x, ]', f (c is sometimes written for ch, e.g.
act, fect, cumacte); ph is used instead of f vheu the
spiraut results from an aspiratcd p and at. the Cl(l of a
syllablc, e.g. in phrecept5ri, olph, neph-[; when the
spirant arises from the aspiration of primitive .%« eitherf
or ph is used, e.g. litfed and tittphed (for -.«ed). Al*art
from tbesc uses h seems to bave hcen an ort.hographic:fl.
luxury. (h is owe miswritten for clé, riz. mettmnihi Wh.
18 a 21, and once used to mark a long vowcl, riz. TERNOHC
in an Old h'ish inscript.io).)
4. g, d, b, m, represented not only the voiced stops and
labials but also thc voiced spirauts T, , ff, g (nasal v);
c, t, p, represcnted botb voiceless aud voiced StOl,S, the
3
latter aftêr vowe|s and sometimes aftcr consonants, c, t, p,
rcpresent voiceless stops in absolute anlaut, aIter vowcls
either voiccless or voiced shq)s; g, d, b, m, l'cpresclt
voiced stops and the labio-nasal () in absolute anlaut, (b)
when doubled, (c) ll the cousonantal groups nd, ld, mb ;
after vowels and most consonants they may reprcsent
cither 'oiced stops or voiccd sprauts.
The following expansion and illustration of thc above
ru]cs may prove useful to the student :
Thc souuds k, t, p, are written :
l. c, t,p, at the beg[nning of a word not 1,receded 1)y
:mother word caming nasalization ; e.g. co..a, tir, peccad ;
hut «« cossa, a rb', a peccad (meallng 'their feet, &c.')
arc souuded a go.sa, a (lb', a bec«ad.
2. c, or cc, t, p, in the interior or at the end of a word,
çc usually after l, r, s ; e.g. ol«c, .e'cc, coacc, macc, ic or icc,
fi'eccor or fi'ecor, ata, art,
The sounds g, d, b, are written :
l. g, d, b, at the beghming of a word ami precedcd
ord causilg aspiration ; e.g. guth, dd, bd. ; but a
a dd, a bds (meaning 'his voicc, &c.') arc sounded
a utl, a &, a ride.
2. c or ce, t, p, in the iaterior or at the end of a word,
e.g. de, becc, do.wc«s, fot (Mod. I. çaa), apa[g.
:L gg, dd, bb, in S.G. and k. of Arm. in the saine cir-
cumstances as 2, e.g. arggit, codeHgg, ardd, abb«Hth.
The sounds , , ri, are wr[tten g, d, b, m.
l. in lenited anlaut, e.g. fter a 'hs,'a gut], a dd,
et be, a mdthir.
2. in the inlaut and auslaut after vowels and most con-
sonants, e.g. tige ldg, adrad, lobur, marb, demb,, larum.
A comparison of the various spellings found is necessary
in order to dctermine the souud in some instances, thus,
that the g, d, b, m of condelg, ard, burbe (second b),
yuidb, are unlenited is proved by the Val'iants coMelc,
art, burpe, 9uidbnm.
In douhtful cascs the Modern language is the only guide.
Prohably ,/,/3, v had each two prommciatiots as in Modern
h'ish, riz. b-r¢«ul =a voiced velar spirant,/ a rotmded
bilabial spirant, = nasal ff; de»uler y =a voiced palatal
aspirant, = an unroundcd bilabial spirant, = nasal ditto.
5. Long vowcls are usually denoted by an acute accent,
in the oldcr MSS. sometimes by doubling, e.g. b(tt, bee,
,'tt ; in cascs of doubling frequcntly the accent is also
employcd and is thon wl'itten indiflrently over thc first or
second vowel : similarly in the case of the long diphthongs,
c.g. di or «rg, di or o[, which for grammatical purposes are
in this book writtcn im'ariably (tf, o[, in order to distinguish
them from a long vowel followed by the glide i as in ldbm
6. A dot writtcn over the letters s and f denotes lenition,
it is also written ovcr the transposcd and » i nasalized
;mlaut, e.g.i. 5t.se )duit, dered i,betho, and over t in
inlaut ])etwcen two consonants, e.g. J)'e«idctir«, ]br)g«tire.
7. In MSS. words which group themselvcs togcther
about a l»rincipal accent arc writcn as one word, c.g.
trhfflC..dS"ge,om, hicecho5«daithe. The following are
somc of the contractions cmployed :
= Lat. et = I. ocus, ' and.'
= Lat. vel = I. n6, le, ' or.'
«1h = oma/(older cmcdl), ' likc,' ' as,' 'as if.'
dU = dalaU, dco, 'then,' 'further,' ' also.'
dï = (lidite, diclle, ' hence.'
[lb or i'= llle'gl1, 'moreoer,' 'but,' 'yet.'
.i. =Lat. h e.t, I. ed 61, 'riz.'
]:)RONUNCIATION.
8. The pronunciation of Old h'ish seems to havc dilrered
con.idcrahly from that of the modern dialects, notaldy in
the folh»ing l,articulars :--th was a voicelcss spirant and
dh a voieed spirant as proved 1)y the Oh| Ieelandic tran-
seriptions of Irish names, e.g. Dfj']»alr= Du.btla«h, Tagkr
= T«dV. Short vowels were noL lengthened by groups or
5
by dying consonauts, e.g. tîgë, cëmt, gërv, âvd, &c. ; final
î and ë were quite distinct, e.g. céle, cgli ; lenited b, m, d, g,
were fully l,ronounced and did hot lengthen or diphthongize
preceding short vowels. In Modern h-ish th has hecome
an h-souud, and dh is lwonounced like gh except thttt in
aulaut hefore e or i, dh bas a weaker articulation than gh
in similar positions.
A,PIRATION OR LENITION.
9. J_n Old I,,,rish.a, sinle consonant betEeeu two yowels
was more loosely articulated t]ïan inabsoht antud
Iedtion. Strictly speakiug, aspiration occurs only i the
ce of the stops c, t, (p in loanwords), g, d, b, aud the
lahio-nasal -m, which are thereby rcduced to the spirants
X, ]', J , 5, ff, ; the spirants .% £ the liquids l, r, and
the nasal n, undergo a similar change more properly called
lenition.
10. The aspirated forms of c, t, p, are representcd in
writing by ch, th, ph, (v. 3), and the leuited forms of s,
and are (in later MSS.) dcnoted by a dot written over
the consonants, hi SG. and later MSS. the piration of
c, t, p, is also marked by writing the sign for thc Greek
.Tirits a.er over the consonants. ]n tbis phonolo
lcnited g, b, l, m, n, r are denoted by the Greek letters
7, ri, ,k, , v, p.
11. ch represents the vclar and palatal voiceless spirants,
i.e. ch in German ach and ich ; for the sounds of the other
spirants v. 3, 4, 8. Lenited s was prouounced as h,
lenitcd f was silcut and consequently sometimes omltted
altogcthcr in writing, e.g. immolag for immfoh«g; in
this case lenitiou occurrcd before pre-historic Le had de-
vclol,ed to and the lenitiou of « produces a more breath,
cf. English e'e»', e'en. from ecer, ecen. A true lcnitcd f
occurs in Modern h'ish and is prouounced h, e.g. md fbCn
(hd[n), ghofi«d (gl(ohad).
12. l, n, r had each four distinct sounds which I repre-
sent by the following symbols :--t = a dcuta|-guttural l, the
thick 1 of Sl,vonic languages closely resembling thc genuine
English sound of 1 in mflk, mild ; l= lenitcd form of t, the
ordinary alveolar 1 in English lot ; L = the palatal lateral l,
English ll in milb))n; /'=lcnited L, an alveolar 1 with
slight palatalization.
11 = an aml,idcntal nasal, the thick t of Slavonic languages,
somewhat like initial n iu Frcnch ton; n=lcnited 11,
alveolar n as in English hot ; N= the palatal nasal English
ni i pbion, French gn in age(tn ; n'=lenitcd a
slightly palatalizcd alveolar n. In the Modern lrish
dinlects of Connacht and Ulster the abovc distinctions of
the souads of 1 and n are still observcd, but of the cor-
rcsponding r- serics only to sounds renmin, riz., p and r'.
13. l, , are uulenited
in anlaut after mlenitcd s, (c)
(d) in anlaut in the D'oup l ([t are assimilated to ç and
L), (e) in anlaut hcfore », t, d, and ', (f) Il, between
vowels or in auslaut=unleuited l, n. r probably re-
maincd unlcnited in similu" positions, but herc the modcrn
languagc gives littlc assistance towards reconstruction.
ASPIRATION AND LENITION IN ANLAUT.
14. Aspiration or lcnition of a consonant occurs--
A
(et) :tftcr thc dat. sg. of the articlc and of substantives.
(b) aftcr thc uom. sg. of all feminine nouns.
((') aftcr thc gen. sg. of masc. and neuf. uouns and the
nom. l,l. çf masc. nouns of o- and io- stems.
(d) aftcr the nom. and roc. pl. of neut. nouns except
wheu they end in -et, in which case thc use varies.
(e) after the nom. acc. and gen. dual masc. atd fem.
(f) after the neuter substat.ive pronoun edetill, the
interrogative pronouns ciM, ced cid, the pers. l,ronoun st
(' she'), thc possess, prououus mo, m- ; do, t-, a (masc. and
ncut.) : the infixcd pers. prououus -m, -t and 3rd g. m.t.
et, (i)d.
B
After verbd forms as follows :
(a) after the absolute forms of the COl,ula in relative
sentences.
(b) after ail forms of the imperative and the 3rd s.
pret. subj.
(c) after the conjunct forms of the Colmla which are
monosyllabic, with the exceptiou of thc 3rd sg.-did, -dib.
-dit), and thc forms which bave hecolne monosyllabic by
contraction, e.g., -bin,-bti., -btnr, -isa in the pret., &c.
(There are some exceptions in Wh).
(d) after »a.u, ce«u, pl. cetu, ceto.
(e) in later Old h'ish aftel" other verl_.s, whethcr the
followi word be object, subject» or adverb.
After uninflected words :
(a) after the preps. (tm«l, av, cer, di, do, ]ied, fo, bn. ',
6 (a), 6.« (ues), tre, trL
(b) after proelitic prepositious and verbal partieles in
relative scntencês.
(c) After the partiele vo (vu) when enclitie and preceded
by a preposition or verbal partiele.
(d) after t.he eonjunetions oct., o (nd), fa (bot), and
usually «ffter e, clct (ce), co, 6, and amal except where
nasaliza»ion interferes, t.he negative ¢con, tacon.
(e) after the particle a (d)used with the 'ocative, and
the eml,hatic su, so used with l,el's, pronouns.
The second member of a compound has its initial con-
sonant aspirated or lenited :
(a) when the first member is a noun or adjective or a
llnnleral.
(b) afer the inseparable l,refixes so- (.t-), do- (du-), ni-.
(c) afer the prepositions aith (ath), air (er-, i'), d[ (de),
fo, imb (/mOn)), bd, 'em, 'o, tarin, fo : in later glosses
after coin-, j'rith-, ictrm-, and sometinleS after .lot" ald etct;
from allalogy with air. This rule holds good for 'erbal
Conlpouuds also exccl, whcn Che 1,1-cposiiol is pt.ctolliC.
In shore aspiration (leniion) occurs wherever a consonant.
was originally vowel-flauked, thus do. çhenetl, be
,'lg-tide are for oldcr dod£ cegl, bend cobaye, -lgo-
.'0(i08.
'ASAI,IZATION.
15. N)- i the 1)honetihatg)roduced in the
x'ord. }- m origal fial o1" mY«,f the 1,reeed-
ing 'Ol'd. Befol'e a vowel or d the original reappears :
g have m aud n (i.e. o) prefixed : c, t, (1) au'e ehallged
to g, d, (b), f to v : s " 1 m , when a vowel precedes, are
doubled, lu writing ltas«tliza$iOll is show cleal'ly Ollly iii
the case of vowels aud nediae, and douhling is frequently
neglectcd. Wben tu'o Wol'ds are 'qtten apart n is some-
times placed separately bet'eeu them, sometimes transposed
to the iuitial of the seeolld wa'd ; lu I,¢,th cases the n bas
usually the pltctttt dele txed, e.g. doch«m » dée or
do¢'htttt )dée.
Sometimes the t is omitted before a word benning
'ith h, e.g. dochttm hb'i.se, but clochttt -b'i..çe when the
h is hot writen.
Somctines the inter'entiou of an enclitic word between
the auslau and anlaut concerned does uot 1,revent the
aspiration or nasalization taking place, e.g.i.ç .¢ i.o chiall
(where cbiall is aspirated by .¢, déde diditt t-ad (where
dgde causes the uasalization t-ad)
Nalization is fOulld il the followiug cases :
A
(a) after the acc. sg. and gen. plut. of all genders ald
the nom. sg. of neuters excep alaill, ha (' some') ced (cid)
and the Jufixed pers. prououn 3rd @. neuter. Other neuters
which did llot origin«lly end in -t cause llasalization from
analogy.
(b) after tlle numerals c6c and sé in the gen. plural.
(c) after all the neuter cases of the dual and after the
dat. dual of ail genders.
(d) after the infixed pers. pronouns of the 3rd sg. masc.
«, d, and sometines after the 3rd sg. fena. and 3vd plur. s.
(e) after the plural possess, pronouns ct', fiv, a (' their '),
whieh are really old gens. plut.
B
After verbal forms: only after the absolute relative
forms of the copul in relative sentences and sonletinles
in interrogative sentences, e.g. cit -é= ' Who are they ?'
C
After uninflected words :
(rt) after the numerals secht, ocht, ot, deich (hot in
compounds).
(b) after the relative particle (s)rt, the conjunctions a
(while), arct, dia, co (cocO, hua ' (6-a").
(c) after the interrogative partiele h (ira belote b).
(d) after the prepositions eo ('with'), [, la»', 'e ('ia) ;
after the eompound lwepositions dochum, in-degcdd, tct'-ési
(whieh are in reality lwepositions and nouns iu the aee. sg.)
the anlaut is nasalized only when iç bears the principal
accent.
I.EMINATION.
16. Gemination is the dottbling o__rjengçhen_i_ng o_f the initi,al
c9nsofi-2(',o, a_Vord due___ ths assimilatiolï of .the fin_.al
consoang of the. prec, gdiaag..a'xrd (usually an original
I--eprësented in writing only after vowels when
words are written together. In Modern Irish the only
trace of gemination lefg is the h- prêfixed to vocalic
anlau after vocalic auslaut, e.g. nx h-6se, .
te h-êlae.
10
Gemination is fouud :
A
(a) after the article (na, na=orinal s5dd.) in the
gen. sg. fera., nom. pl. fera. and neuter: and acc. pl. of all
genders, e.g. innc¢mmaccu (acc. pl. masc.),fovcmmorchol
(acc. pl. heur.).
(b) after the nom. and acc. sg. neuter nec, 'some.' e.g.
nannçncdled.
(c) after the interrogative c[a (which also aspirates), a
'ber' (a = orinal "es[ds): and after the infixed pers. pro-
nouns da, ta, a, as 3rd sg. fcm. and 3rd pl.
B
After forms of the copula :
(a) after the pretcrital and modal 3rd sg. ha except in
relative sentences.
(b) after ni= original
C
(a) fter the prepositions a (original eks), co, Jv[, la.
(b) all prepositions which end in a vowel, the particles
fo, no, and the negtives ni {mani, coni, &c.), nd
conna), when no infixed pronoun is attached douhle the
anlaut of the following verb or verbal compould, except
relative sentences.
(ç) after ama between comparatives, e.g.
ma..a, ha, ' nor ', nd ' six' except lu gen. 1,1., the particle a
used heforc numerals.
Loss or' Asem.VrlOl (LE.NITION).
17. When, owing fo syncopation, two aspirated conson-
ants of the saine class came together they both gave up their
aspiratiouç and when one aSl,irated consonant united with
another unaspirated homornic consonant the saine resuit
ensued; thus ch+ch, or ch+c, or c+ch.>c,; th+th,
or th + t, or t + th = t : e.g. tecte = teg-gn5th-de
Tn]-e), .mitter - midther (m+er), mcrclr= marc-chb'.
11
Aspirated t and d Iost their aspiration after l, t, ., and
belote ,. After s aspirated d not only gave up its aspira-
tion but 1,eeame unvoieed, e.g. bé.ste, bds.te, < bés-e,
bds-ge. Lenited l and n. lost their lenition belote d, t,
r, s, and after l, '. The al»ove l»honetie changes do not
invariably appear in wl'iting owing to the etymologieal
spellings, just as in Modern h'ish we write co,, tolSça.
but pronounee coF.,
I)OUBLE CONSONANT,q.
18. Double eonsonants frcquently m'ise through com-
position or syneopation, e.g. frercor <fi'et-cor, brotn <
b'tsto., a»tt tts < ad-me.s.; or in latcr Ohl Irish by assimi-
lation of td, Id, ê.g. imta < btda, 2ttallacht < 2taldadtt.
QUALITY OF TtlE CON,qONANTS.
19. In OIdIrish every eonsonantexeeptthelabials hadthree
distinct pronuneiations, riz., pal«t«tl, tetttral, and 'elar:
or as it is sometimes expressed an i-quality, an a-quality,
and an t-quality. A consonant has the i-quality belote or
after e or i, e.g. cé, c[a, [ce : the a-quality before or after
a or o, e.g. c«tra, cos, .(tccat ; the t-quality before or aftcr
t, e.g. er't, .'ucct. In the first case the middle of thê
tongue is raised fo the hard palate, in the second the baek
of the tongue is raised to the soft palatejust behind the hard
palate, in the third the baek of the tongue touches the
baek portion of the soft palate while the lips are protrudcd
and roundêd. In Modern Irish the a- and t-qualities are
elassêd together as non-palatal (Le.ç«n) in eontradistinetion
to the palatal or i-quality (c,oL), but the distinction in
pronuneiation between the a- and t-qualities is still marked
in many cases. In the case of the labials palatalization is
impossible, but as thê lips are protruded when the labial is
prêeeded or followêd by a, o, or t. and retraeted when it
is preeeded or followed by e or i this protrusion or retrac-
tion of the lips forms for the labials a distinction eorres-
ponding to the palatal and non-palatal pronuneiations of the
other eonsonants.
12
(*HANGE OF QUALITY.
20. When two consonants of ,lifferent quality corne
together owig to syneopation the second consonant (except
in the case of u-qualit.y+i-quality) takcs as a rule the
quality of thc first: thus non-p..+pal. > non.p.e.g..fodlat
(5 X ) from fo-dalet («-X'); pal.+non-p.>pal, e.g.
aithrea (1,/ p) from %tthera (1,- o «') ; pd. +u-quality>
pal. e.g. abgliu (gi Ai) from ïa{gilu (fil _ Au) ; but u-quality
+pal.>p:d. e.g. fox, de (T' ') from fo-gnde (g,,_i).
Compounds are au exception to the above rules.
CONSONANTAL GIOUPS BEFORE e, i.
21. ]efore syncopation had taken 1,lace, and l)eforc the
loss of the vowel of the final syllable, if a group of two or
more difl?rent consonants stood before e or i only the last
consonant of thc group was 1)datal. When the group,
through the loss of the followiug vowel, came to stand at
the end of the syllahlc the wholc group became palatal : if,
however, thc vowel was retained, the whole m'oup after-
wards became non-palatal in accordance with t.he rule given
in § 20, e.g., .ç'erc nmde its dat. sg. seirc (r k ) Irom .e.rki,
but its gen. sg. scrcae
The consonantal gt'oups t)t, IXp m', td, dc (=g)
had become palatal at an early time, and accordingly
remained palatal cven before a retaiued vowel, e.g., immbi,
clainde, cuimrech. Siugle l, r, , if they had 1)een orin-
ally 1,receded hy a consonant (the loss of which was
represented hy compensatory lengthening of the vowel),
actcd like consommtal groups, e.g., 9abdh«e, gen. sg. of
9ab61 from -'» gabaglS, .so-..célae for «so-.scetle ; céle (from
-"-keglio.ç') is a,t exception, but it has followed the analogy
of aile, alaile. The group cht is always non-palatal.
DEPALATALIZATION,
22. At the beginning of a syllable when preceded by
d, u, o or da, the labials b, p, f, m, and the gutturals g, c,
ch, »g become no-l)alatal, e.g., opai»" (dat.. sg.) from Lat.
13
ope'a ; cntimai llOlll. 1,1. of cm'tire : ungae = uncia, lit the
second stage of Old lrish thc palatal quality as still
l'etained in unaceented syllal,les, e.g. o«hetl, uailhed, J'ugell,
toceth ; le,tel', achad, uathatl, fit,.lall, tocad. (see further
Bergin, Èriu III.)
CONFUSION OF rg- AI'i]D (t-{UALITIES.
23. Thc consonants ch, cc, th (and the d= which
(levclolS front it.), ,s in auslaut after original a hae thc
a-qualit.y instead of wquality, e.g. cath (stem ('atu),
coml,Otlld cocttd<*com-calh ; mttcc dat. sg. fl'Oll llt(t¢'C[t,
çc: laldals and guttuvals whi('h i lhe eavlier glosses
usu;dly havc the u-quality, gvadually assume the a-quality
the later glosses, c.g. comnuil, menmuin, .ce('huin, ltrtel"
comail, me»main, .ce«haiu.
()IHI;INAI INITIAL CONSONANTS.
24. Original s in the aldaut of proclitic Wol'ds is lost, e.g.
it from *senti, lat..s.unt ; ttm¢til fl.ol .s'amttil, lat. 'imili. ;
thc arLiclc iml, a for «iml, ..en ; t in the ,saine position
changes to d, e.g. do, dar, for oldcr to, tar.
OI:.IGINAL FINAL CONSO!NANTS.
Original fiual r, rt, It, cht, t (i.e. d or dd) fl'om -rit
(-rot), are rctained, e.g..iu»., Lat. o»'o»', .be»'at (for beroM) ;
dét (for denO, W. dant.
Final m was chuged to n bcfore it was lot ; it reappears
bcfore vowels and d, e.g. deich n-uai. (for -dekn):fer
n-Étend for %tiran. Singlc d, t, k, t, (from-n or-m),
disappearcd in absolute ausl;utt ; also thc groups-ks,-t',
-t.s.,-st, probably after first being l'educed to single %
e.g. tod > t6, ka'dt > .cara, %'êl, > '[, »ên > ml,
" karant. > car(a)e, steihst > .te;.
Loss OF CONSONANTS.
25. t3y dissimiltiol, c.g. jbr.rolchtm <for.ro-cchan<
14
jor.>'o-chcchc,, in-rohjrcdm < in-ro-«gr«i>m i>v>'o-cde-
:l>'dm. By reduction of consonantal groul,.% e.g. Uhlia <
+ dilmh'a, .cum9«tt < + cttm u<d«tt, .ort < + o>'ch t.
COM PENSATORY ],ENGTHENING.
lu origimd groul)s of consonants thc spiranis ch, ,
bctwccn a vowel and » l, », and th bcforc / and », dis-
al)pearcd ; the lost consommt was compcnsatcd by Icng-
thening a precc<ling short vowcl. A similar compensation
sometimes follows the loss of n and nff(). ExamldCS:
ddr < +d(tchr, ch" < +(tg»', (b'ttm < +t«d'(tm, cd('l < +
ceucthl, <»> < +eth, cdt < +cent, «:imm <
v. 26. d, 28. b, 30. b.
'| ETATIIESIS.
26. lXIetathesis is frequcnt in Modcrn lrish, but sel<loto
occurs in Old h'ish ; examl,]es from Ohl lrish are «t,'cnam
for +(,'.nam from +adco.utm, (,l.comti ; I«ffbo't for
+lttbgttrt, bd»'le (once) for bdlre.
THE VOWELS IN ACCENTED YLLABLES.
27. d rclweseuts
(a) Id.G. , e.g. mdthh', Lat. inciter, I)or. Gk.
(b) ]dAL , e.g. d5EE, Lat. d»um, Gk.
Lat. 6tus, ,oos.
(c) d ariscs from Id.G. long sommt
(d) d also arises by compeusatory lengthening, e.g.
<.ï represents--
Lat. «v««t»-u», Gk. };.poïpov.
(b) }d.G. ,:qh'v (e), e.g. athir, Lat. ptev, Gk. .,,.wip,
Skr. pitd, Id f'_,. +potêr.
(c) (ï also arises from Id.G. sommL -, /before vowels and
15
spirants, e.g. barr < * bh'.s-, %»m'b < * mmos, all< %)1.%
t(«,'t<tt'st-; froln Id.G. % '! belote vowÇîs, pirallts
m, e.g. tàe<t -, (lk. rav«d ; samail<m)-, Gk. la.
28. d relwesents--
(««) Id.G. ei. e.g..tégot<steighot, Gk. «rdXm', Goth.
sle[ga,. In i:tter ()hl lrish this éwas dil,htlmngized passing
through da into [(, c.g..ti(,gat, s[as (sêsus),
(rêgula).
(b) g m'ises l»y coml,ensatory lengtheling ri'oto ê and «ï
e.g. ce,él < %e**ethl-, dér < da£'r-, ]g» < «egn-.
ê represents--
(««) Id.G. ç, e.g. ech < %Uy-, Lat. equus; berM<
%hcreti, l,at. Jbrt, (lk.
(b) Id.G. ï when the following syllahle eontaincd
oriNlmlly O, or 5, or 6 whieh had hot 1,eeome -, e.g..lr
< uiros, jëdb < :d(Iç«? ; (i betore ,d relnained, e.g.
< «i»dos).
29. represents--
(a) Id.G. L e.g. '[m, O.H.G. '[m ; Ii, Lat. lror.
(b) Id.(l. ê. e.g. jTv, Lat. vêrus: 'i<'ê£'s, I,:tt. '«.r;
lln, Lat. plêms.
î represents
(a) 1,1.G. ï, e.g. ibM, Skr. pibati, l,at., bibit.
(b) Id.(l. g when the following syllahle eontained i or
e.g. .bim" < bir5 < %ber6, m il < %,eli, cim < ]?'cmff, fur
(c) sometimes arises froln Id.(l. m and y, e.g. imb<
mbhi, itgmd <
30. d represents--
((«) Id.G. au, cm, e«: e.g. t,«ath<teut-: hiad, Lat.
laus landi. ; r««d (older ::rdd) Goth. 'aul,., I,ith. 'audù :
ldche, Gk. Xe,,gç, Lat. le.r, Id.(l. Ç le«k-.
(b) d arises by eompensatory lengthening, e.g. «ar (older
edr)<%gr-; .«'vdn<m'oh»*-; sua (s6»,)<solm-, l,at.
som«.% Arm. k'«»,; by eontl'aetiol td<to-«o<to-jb.
16
l'cpresets--
(a) Id.(. 6, e.g. o«ht, I,at. octo, G]« «-r(5; en'ho, Lat.
«wbns, (k.
(b) bi.G. whcn thc folh,wing sylhtble eont:tined
c.g. cl,)l] <ek[ttt«m,
(«) sometimes «ï belote a p:l;tt;tl or n-quality ('OllSOIltllt,
c.g. boi[l (or baill)
(a) hl.G.d., e.g. eS1,
(b) avises from t bcfm'e a yncol,ated cowel, e.g. d}-
ff rcpresents
(b) ld.t. whcn thc following sylhd,lc contabed i () or
(c) Sometimes «ï bcfm'e a cosonat or cons«mats ith
ç or u-quality, c.g.
balb.
(d) in ' and
Skr. krmih, Lith. kirmi; db«ig<dlgi.
G L I D ES.
32. \Vhcn an ccented sylhblc containing a nou-palat:d
vowel ,r diphthong ends in a p:datal consonant or con-
sonantal group, a palatal glide represented l»y i is usually
inserted belote the consonant or.g'oup, e.g. ldim for hb»;
tci.t for testi: cl,ti»de for «ltn'd'e. Belote an (t-quality
ccmsouant or group no glide was represented in writing,
but tiret a glide was prououneed is shown by Modern Irish
F¢'.Xl t, Ee.xnS.x. Belote wquality consonants a glide t was
inscvtcd after ,ï, ê, î (somctimcs an -glide aftcr ê belote ch),
c.g. bot tll < «balb« ; neuçh or woçh < & »wçb « ; .bitr < bimt.
GLIDES BEFORE ¥-}WELS IN AU.LAVT.
33. A palatal glidc is usually insertcd bctwcen a palata|
I?OIl.qOlltllE Ol" COllSOlltlAlt$ alld ,% ill;tl (7, O, O1" H, e.g. toim.eo
17
(i.e. sio) e..çeirgiu (/'u). In older MSS. as a fuie no glide
is written between a non-palatal consonant and final e or,
although the word must bave been pro»tomwed with a non-
palatal glide, e.g. ch(fmi d[gle, later c»dmai, diglae. In
still later MSS. final -cee becomes -a, and -eo, -ea become e.
THE TRUE DIPHTHONGS.
34. The true Dipthongs are ai (ae), ol (oe), ni, du, do,
éu, éo, t'n. In later MSS. ed and o[appcars as cee, oe, and ae
and oe are frequently confused, e.g. «tg is also written tes,
o[s, or des.
ai represents Id.G. ai, e.g. cdech (calch), Lat. caecus,
Goth. haihs.
ol represents (a) Id.G. oi, e.g. ohé, O. Lat. oino, Gk. o5,v ;
mob, Lat. reveniez,
(b) arises l)y contraction of o+ e and reduction of oye,
e.g..fobnat < .fo-emat; totecb < Sto-«essach, W. tywysog.
(c) by contraction from «tk«i, eg. go[< Sg5«in, con-.o[<
con.e«d.
u[ arises from uti, e.g. dru[, < druei(d)s ;
t. ortis.
dt (later 6) represents
(a) Id.G. ou, e.g. dt (6), Lat. a,tris, Gk. o:««, Goth.
anse, Lith. anse.
(b) Id.G. 6u, e.g. ddu (later d6), Skr. dz'au, Lat. duo,
Gk. 8, Id.G.
(c) arises by contraction, e.g..tdu < «.td_u < SstoEi5 ; ldu
<Sld-u< ldthu ; also from Z before a lost vowel, e.g. gdu,
(g6) <
du (go) arises
(a) by contraction from e + u, e.g. bdu, béo, 1st sg. subi.
from
(b) from eLt (older it), e.g. bdu, bdo (adj.) from
%itos.
(c) in syllables containing d long by compensation, e.g.
B
18
Cn < etn(t. It is also used to represent the Latin Io- in
E useph = Joseph us.
lu arises by contraction from i + u, e.g..biu < bi(()u <
b'6 ; b[u (dat. sg. of adj. bdu) < biu.
VOWELS IN UNACCENTED SYLLAILES.
35. In original final syllables :
5 became u, e.g..bht firu, .htr, from bii6, tir6ns, or
: dr6s. %tes.Sr.
ê beoeme i, e.g. c«thiç mdt]z5", from *potê3
buç -the, çerminaçion of 2nd sg. imper, dep. from *-thês.
ô, before iç drol,ped, beeame 6, e.g. in an Ogham insezp-
tion ; naqua(t) for *maquon.
Final vowels disappead, e.g. tir, .bered, ce«r, for
or tb-ç bh'eto, kar5. Short vowels before consonants
were also lost, c.g. fer, con, sail for tb'os or tiro»t,
-*kunos, s«diks. Long vowcls before original final conson-
ants are tained as shooE vowels, e.g. firu, .bera, tuatha,
for tb's, %herdt, teutds. Thatfer (gen. plur.) mains
instead of firu is to be explCned by the hypothesis that
tb'6m was shortened to drôu befoi'e the case-ending was
lost.
After , or " the vowels of the final syllable are
retained in a shortened form, e.g. aile, aili, do.gn[u, for
UNACCENTED VOWELS IN CLOSED SYLLABLES.
36. When an mmccented vowel, no matter what its
origin, stood between two consonants belonng to the
saine syllable it appeared in writing :
(a) between two palatal consonants as i, e.g. berid
(bhereti), exceptionally as e, e.g. solrfed.
(b) between two non-palatal consonants as a, e.g. tegl«ch
from teg-i.ldg ; as.rubetrt from as'ru-bert.
(c) between two u-quality consonants as u, e.g. cumung
(dat. of cumang) from cut'ctn' g u.
19
(d) between a palatal and non-palatal consonant as e,
e.g. tuirem from to-rim.
(e) between a non-plntal
{later ai), e.g. fodil from fo-ddil, rethit (= reth"itq from
< %'etontL
(f) between an u-qualify and a palatal eonsonan as i or
-ut, e.g. eomff or comuil
(9) beween a palatal and an u-qualiy eonsonan as
e.g. bnniud da. sg. of imned.
(h) beween an u-quality and a non-palatal eonsouan
or vice ver.a, as o or u, e.g. fi9or (' figura '), flechod or
fleuchud ; dénom or d&mm ; .dgor or .dgm'.
In open syllab]cs unaeeented vowels were treated
similarly, but the writing varies eonsiderably.
SYNGOPATION.
37. After the vowel of the filml syllable had disappeared,
ntained more than two syllables, the vowel of the
If. trie wordoltained rive or
more syllablea, the vowel of the fourtll syllable was also lost.
This change takes place in fixed eompounds as well as in
simple words and resulted from the position of the accent
whieh fell primarily on the first syllable and seeondarily on
the third and fifth, e.g. dligthech, toimseo, .to»mibther,
for dligethech, tomes.«o, to-monibith ; similarly in
loan-words, e.g. apstal, epscop, for poslohts, episcol)u&
The vowcl was retained before cht, e.g. cumaehtach.
abie .i beeame e, e.g. no.betis for %m.bibtis. When
a deuteotoni vërbal form
noepe take place but the toEoclitie D'eposition returns to
ifs cc£ntedfr deutel-otn. a.:bera becoes irototon.
7et = %kbret < «ks-bhero , c .Lat. eïmt < C-ferunt ;
deuteroton, do.rochab" > prototon..torcha[r < to-ro-cer.
The absence of syneotion is due to the influence of
another form, e.g. sochumacht well as sochmacht owing
to the form cumachte. When for some reason the second
20
syllable remined unsyncopted the vowel of the thrd
syllable fell out in woll of four or more syllables, e.g.
cumachtcle for «cumachtachu.
I)EVELOPMENT OF NEW VOV(ELS.
38. When through loss of vowcls in middle or final syl-
lables a nasal or liquid came to stand between consonants,
or in uslaut fter consonant, it remined its consonantal
character only (a) when preceded by a similar consonant or
n, m fter a vowel +r, l, , e.g. do.«r-r-chétdo.««re -
ro-chet, i««rn < is««rnon, form < upeme, s(dm
psalmus, naidm < namn- ; (b) when the preceding
consonant has disappeared e.g. db'me<«ad-r[me (v. 25 ;)
(c) when the nsals stand before homorganic medie,
e.g. frecdh'c < s frith-comdo'c-, .fitlgM < deuteroton,
fo.longid. In all other ces the nsals and liquids be-
came sonant, nd from these sonants arose new vowels,
e.g., do»un from do»z < do»tnos ; ecilse, ecoLso,
from ecse, eco ; arathar from arat]t3"< aratron (W.
aradr).
VOWEL-CONTRACTION.
39. If two vowels came together in a word which fter
syncopation had still more than two syllbles, they fre-
quently coalesced, e.g. ldthoe" as well as loa tltar < s lota tron
impdd, and bpuud < «i»b-ioud. Also in wekly ccented
disyllabic words contraction may take place, e.g. d5i5 nd
doctib, d[b and diib, monosyllabic h as ell as likt ; so
also 6s for 6 ets, hdlctilht for 6 ahtiliu.
rOCALISM OF ROCLITIC WORDS.
40. e in anlaut of proclitic words becomes a, e.g. as-, a for
accented form e.s(s) < « eks ; aclt < S ektos ; ara for emm
«eoi : a heur. article for «sen. If the word bas a in the
first syllable the vowel of the second syllable changes to a,
e.g. ala from ctile, ara for s ate, la for le. In ocus for
initial a is chnged to o through the influence of the
u-quality c. Before et, o, e is often changed to i, e.g. ci
21
«.'bera for ce ; l[a = le + a ; o before a frequently becomes
u, e.gfa-a forfo-a.
TItE CONSONANTS.
41. k (C) and ch represent--
(a) Id.G. k', q and qU, e.g. cét, W. cant, Lat.
dei('l, Lat. decem, Goth. ta[hu, Arm. tasn ; sechithS
Lat. sequi, Gk. Zwe«0«t, Lith. sekh.
(b) Id.G. t'h, e.g. cbgid, Skr. khajati, O.H.G.
sc)t, Skr. cby5ti, Lat. sciscere.
(c) cht also arises from T + t, e.g. "«c]t, t-preterite of
agid (/og), latt. agere ; from p+t, e.g. secht Lat.
septem, Gk.
g (g, C) an(l r (g) represent
(a) Id.G. g' and g, e.g. gndth, Gk. ,,»rd, Skr.
teg, Lat. tegere, Gk.
(b) Id.G. g'h, ffh, and g"l, e.g. ge«lmred, Lat. Mems,
Gk. e,(&,, Skr. ]i»d : cum-mg, Lat. cmgere, GI«
Goth. agffvu8, (u/ag'h) ; gti»'id, Lat. form«.% GI«
t and th represent
(a) Id.G. t (and Europ. t=Skr, th), e.g. tri, Lat. tres,
Gk. Cpa, Skr. trayoh; roth, Lat. -»'otc, Lith. rtas, Skr.
(b) ]d.G. t], e.g. -t]e (termination of 2nd sg. imper.
Dep.), Skr. -tiédir, Gk. - ().
(c) Id.G. ],, e.g. art, Lat. ur.«s, Gk. p«¢o, Skr. 2'ksha].
(d) t also arises from d+l, e.g. btamil<*bd-,am[1,
int othi»" < b«d.. atMr < %bMos
d (d, t) and f) (d) represent
(a) Id.G. d, e.g. dau»', Gk. p¢, Skr. ddru; saMid,
suide, Lat. sede»'e, Gk. ë$oç, Skr. sddah.
(b) Id.G. d], e.g. de»ait, del, Gk. OvX*, Lat. filius
<fliw% O.H.G. tila : raid, Skr. ddIu, Gk.
(c) d (written t) also arises from -t, e.g. dét, cét, and
Irom t in proclitic words v. . 25.
(d) î (written d) rel)resets Id.G. z belote g and b-
with a following d it combines to form dd (written t), e.g.
Tadc (i.e. T«g), ,»edg, Med. Lat. »e.ga ; odb, Gk. «r:ç ;
net, O.H.ç. test, Arm. dst.
p aises from an older b which through syncopation
cornes to stand before lenited s (=b), c.g. i»»pt«de for
*imb-.ude; impu for %;mb u. ld.G. p in aulaut and
betwecn -owcls has disaiq,eared, e.g. atbir, Lat. pater,
Gk. arp; lethan, Gk. Xa:ç, Lith. platia»; tee, Skr..
t@«»t-, lat., t@ere: fo<o<tpo, Gk. ;.=d. s) aud sph
la aulaut are treated like s2 ; they appear as s, lenited to
f (pb), e.g. sine, bd trçphne, Lith..ç)e»tys, O.H.G. spmtni ;
seir, d[ pherid, (spher-), Skr. sThttrt Gk. «6,pd, ;
selg (spleen.)<%pelg'h5, Gk. «X-@, «wXTx'a ; Id.G.
lp, top, 1)ecame rr, ll, »trt. e.g. ser»', Lat. sm79o, Gk.
Lett. siTe; .tellq, .talla, Lith. telph ; camm, Gk.
Goth. ha»tri', lnitml p in Irish only occurs in loan-words.
The stages of the rcducrioa of Id.G. p are 1)>ph (i.e.
p+h)>pf>f>h>ntdl. In the Germanic languages it
reached the fourth stage, it anlaut, cf. English father.
b (writtcn b, p) and (written b) represent--
(a) Id.(. b, e.g. ibM, Skr. p[bati; sliab, Eng..clip.
(b) hl.G. bl, e.g. birt, (¢k. 6p(», Lat.]ero, Skr. bhçtrSmi,
O.H.G. biru; imbliu, Gk. dgXdç Skr.
(c) ld.G OE, e.g. béu, bdo, Lat. vivu.% Lith. gyr««.¢, Goth.
qitts, Arm. kea-; imb (but.ter), Lat. tngtte»t., Skr. aj.
O.H.G. ¢tncho, Pruss. anktan, Arm. auc- from .x/
(d) fl ariscs from .Z after r, l, t, , e.g. tarb < t«trgos ;
selb, W. helw ; b«t»b, W. bçmw ; ]èdb (i.e. fev) from
idt : from m + r, e.g. cubu. from ¢com-/X.sus ; cobodltts
from com@-ddlu.
(e) fl (b) sonmtines represents -Z- of the szo-future in
inlaut after s, always as final, e.g. do'nesbe, "ldciub; cf.
also tinib 3rd sg. subi. of do.bt@t (i.e. do'in-zet).
f represents
(a) in absolute anlaut Id G. 2, e.g. fer, Lat. uit;
Lat. ttêrlt8.
(b) arises from lenited s«, e.g. mofit«" (absolute
tinfed (4/s«êd).
(c) sometimes is written for b (i.e. ri) in inlaut and
auslaut, e.g. Bclzefi«th, gv««f (from Lat. gvat'i,).
n alld y represent--
(a) Id.G. n, e.g. ntde, nt«c«e, Skr. nd«yc&, I,ith.
Arm, nor <*.,tovros ; se,, W. hen, Lat. sertis., Gk. 5'v
(b) Id.G. final -m, e.g. scdl'<'sketlon.
(c) original m in compounds ],efore d, e.g. ,'ondelc
< *co m delc.
m and (i.e. nasal u or v), both written m, represent--
(a) Id.G. m, e.g. mtli»', Lat. m«tteç Gk. t*ir,p;
Skr. ddmyat Gk. Sagdç% Lat. doma'e.
(b) m arises out of another nasal before b (without
syncopation), c.g. imb (butter), from ir»b, imbitth for
bi, tth.
(c) m arises from Keltic b before t, e.g. slemon from
slibo-, domu, from d,bno-, cf. (aulish Dtb,orex ; rond
(gen. sg. and nom. pl. of bot) for bn5s.
w (written n) arises--
(et) from Id.G. w only ],cfore Keltic 9, e.g. b,gen, Lat.
(b) from another nasal before g, e.g. co,gtam for com-
ffnlm.
r and (1)oth written r) represent
(a) Id.G. % e.g. 'o9id, Lat. 'egere, Gk. dp;y«,;
Lat. cd',t.% Lett. kd's.
(b) arises out of 1 by dissimilation, e.g. availe as well as
«dalle.
(c) sometimes in unaccented syllables from Id.G. z be-
fore ff, e.g. dlbb'ci,td from do'bid«i (i.e. do'bigi).
1 and k (both written 1) represent Id.G. l, e.g. li9EM, Lat.
lb,gere, Gk. X¢lX¢t', Goth. bi-laig6,; meIM Gk.
Lat. »oleve, Goth. mala,t.
S represents Id.G. , e.g. srtth, Skr. srdvati; echte,
Lat. nix, Goth. snaiws, O. S1. sneg : is Lat. est, Gk.
"24
II.--THE ARTICLE.
42. The article has for its foundation a demonstrative
%'en to which, except in the nom. and act. sg. neutcr and
originally probably in the nom. and act. plural, is added
t.he Id.G. pronominal stem to-, tri-, found in Gk.
Lat. is-ta, Eng. that. The following is a hypothetical
paradigm of the Proto-Keltic forms :--
Singular.
In aecordanee with the laws of l,honetic change in
proclitic words (v. §§ 24, 40.) the abo'e fonns would give
fise in prehistoric Old h'ish to the following :--
Singular.
In the phu'al the fem. forms ousted the neut. as they
eventually did the masc. also except the nom. so that the
paradigm is reduced to--
nmsc. fera. and heur.
N. sindi sbd(s
G. sindan
D. sinda,b
A.
With the loss of initial s (v. § 24) and the case-endings,
and the assimilation .nn<d this gives in the Old Irish
period--
25
Singular.
mase. fera. neut.
N. b, bt (bef. vowels) imt' bt', btt[
((bel..) J
(. btd', b', 5.t (bel..<.) ima v, a v as in masc.
D. -(s)bd', -(.)b', -(s)-bt (bel. ) as in mase. as in nmse.
h. i'",-s-bi" b",-sb'"
Phu'al.
toast, fera and neut.
N. bd', in', bt (I)ef..)
ail genders.
A. i«t «, (t «, -,(t «.
43, In thc dual the article has always the form
In the above paradigm- ', _«,_ ,,, indicate resl,cctively
aspiration (lenition), gemination, or nasalization of the
initial consonant of thc followin word. The
represents thc unroicing of the d of bd produced by a
following h-sound, i.e.. either of the original ending -os or
in the lenited anlaut of the succeeding word, thus : nom.
nasc. sabds atr> Sbd(a).g atbb'> si»dh
aHHr ; gen. masc. s sbdi soi > Sbd dtb >
(i.e. tbt); nom. fera. ssbda soil.e>xind oil.se>b
soils'e (i.e. oils'e). For aspiration (lenition), nasaliza-
tion and gemination after the article v. 14a, 1SA, 16A.
The initial s of the article is retained in the dat. and
acc. sg. and plur. after prepositions whiçl originally euded
in a consonant., riz. , co (with), ff'i, i, lav, la, ve, ar, tri ;
also after co (o) and sometimes after for : e.g.c.,in, asaib
< Ses. set, Ses eobi ; isin, i.¢a < sit sentu or
sot sert. sSbtdaib, Ssinda.s (dat. and acc. pl.) are syncopated
to szaib, s, and after preposigions ending in a vowel the
initial si- are lost, e.g. do, db, daib, for do, di
6 s.bdaib. In Old Irish of the 2nd stage (v. Introduction)
md- is sometimes retained, e.g. bda, du»dmb. The d of
the article is retained before lenited l, v, m a vowel or
lenited e.g. bd lib.uir (gen. masc.), id ie», ind flaith
(noms. fera.)
26
44. The neuter form of the article ch, a" is used as
relLtive e.g. an a.bhtr= 'what I say,' arrq)redchad <an
rwpredchad='wht bas been pceached.' Itis Mso used
with af, co, di, 6 (hua) to form conjunctions, riz. ara", co '
(=co + a'), dia", hd", hna'", e.g. arambiat < * a r-an-biat,
combin con-bin, diambad; used alone before a nasalizing
rebtive sentence it means 'when,' e.g. an no-n-derbfd
whell you prove.
THE ARTICLE V¢ITII DEMONSTRATIVES.
45. The deictic particle -i, found in Gk. obroe-[, Lat.
qd=quo+, is compounded with various forms of the
article to form demonstrative pronouns ; thus masc. nom.
bt[, gen. ind[ or idh[, feln. nom. 5Ml or bdh[, gen.
bmah[, heur. nom. ad, coin. gen. pl. immd, &c. Before
reltive verb the forms menn 'he, she who, tht which,'
&c. ; before a proper nanle inti=' the aforementioned,' e.g.
ht[ 3[oysi, fi»rshm[ Dcmid : note especially the use of the
neuteL e.g. eod a. mane='tht which is marie," i.e. the
cO'd « lllII"
46. The article is used demonstratively in conjunction
with the particles so(.a) = ' here ', .in = ' there ', tall
' yonder' (lit. ' on t, he other side '), «cut =' yonder' (lit. ' ai
tbee'), tua.ç-- 'above'; .o(sa) usually becomes se, seo, sea
after a word ending in a palatal consonant, e.g. in fer so
(fer «) ind tir se (tir i) in ]ër tall, & fer ucut, in
(for the construction cf. the French cet ho»nne-ci, cet
homme-là). The al,ove demonstrative may be fm'ther
eml,hasized 1)y the introductmn of the particle 4, e.g. & fer
[,sitt. (l+so), in fer [.'b,, in fer ithall.
III.--THE NOUN.
47. There are three genders of nouns--masculine, femi-
nine, and neuter; three numbers--singular, dual, and
plural ; and rive cases--noninative, genitive, dative, accu-
satire, and vocative. The dual is ouly employed after the
numeral da (dg). The gen. and dat. sg. of some stems
27
were originMly locative or instrmnental, and the dat. pl. of
all stems is derived from the Id.G. iustrulnental. In cimt
< 'kt2e»me i or 'ktemm'= 'at the end of,' the old locative
is retained distinct froln the «bt. cric»m. In ueuter uouns
the nom. aee. and voe. have the smne form. In the dual
of ail genders the nom. and aee. are the saine aud the voe.
is lost. Olfly the mase. -o- stems retain a roc. sg. distinct
from the nom. sg. ami, with the exeel,tion of nasal stelns,
the dat. and ace. sg. of fera. nouns have the saine forln.
48. Fol" purposcs of declension the llOUn8 are divided
inço two groups, riz- vocalic stcnls and ctm.so»antal stems.
A.--VOCALIC STEMS.
1. -o- stclns. Masculine and neutcr.
Thc Id.G. case-cndings for N.G.D.A.V. of-o-and -o-
stems are as follows :--
Prehistoric Irish case-endings of -o- and o- stems :
49. Examples of Old Irish declension ;
law. (As in the partigm of the ariele
neug. dliged, ' '
., denoe aspiration or lmsalization of the sueeeedinp-.
anlaut.)
28
Siug. Dual Plural
IllaC. lletl, l/lt.c, llell. IllaSc. nellt.
fll hed'
N. fer dliged ' er' dhed'* tir' (dleda'
G. tir' dligid' jër' dlied'* fer'* dliged'*
D. tire" dligud' feraib * dligedaib" feraib dliçedaib
( dloed'
A. fer'* dliged" fer' dl[ged'" firtt ldltoeda'
V. tir' dlied ' fi»'t hot round
Nouns whose ffual syl]able bas é by COml)ensatory leng-
theuiug form their gens. sg. in -duil, -éoil, or [uil : e.g. s«él,
gen. scéuil or .ceoil ; nél, gên. [uil. Short ê is sometimes
retained in the gen. sg. side by side with infecting -i;
e.g. nei«t, eich. In the dat. sg. «e-iufectiou is uot always
round ; e.g. mcwc, .nalm, corp, bd.« : in such cases the dt.
does hot differ fl'om the nom. in form. Sometimes the
disp|nces the root vowel : e.g..on, ball, crann, dtt. sg.
bull or baull, crunn, : ech makes d«t. eoch, acc. pl. eochu
(v. § 32); ia.c, fiach, Dia make geu. sg. and nom. pl.
éi8c, féi«h, Dç but b[ad, dhdl (disyllahic)make gen.
and dat. sg. biM, bind, diill, diull : demun bas nom.
1,1. demnae through the influence of Lat. daemonia (Thm'n).
Some heur. nouus in -ch form phu'als like s-stems, e.g.
to.sach, nom. ld. to.ge ; cuimrech, dat. pl. cuimrigib.
"2. -o- stems.
50. Exam],les: toast, céle, 'coml,amon" ": ueut. orme,
' hea, rt.'
In nouns with non-palatal groups of cousouants the dat.
sg. ends in et iustêd of-la, e.g. daltu, cum«chtq from
daltae, cmnachtae, and in later MSS. flêir ending-ae is
29
frequently written -ct. Dubti occurs a few rimes for
dui»titt. The following nouns are irregulm': duine, plut'.
N.A.V. dohd, G. doine, D. dobtib ; h«dide, plut. G.
Iude, D. h«deib or Itdéib, A.V. h«deu or Indeiu : lctthe
bas also the shorter forms N.A. sg. lcte, ldct, O. bd, D. ldu,
hio, /dG ld, N.çLA. pl. icte, id. D. htïb. The o- stems
had the saine case-endings as the -o- stores |»u$ they are
distinguished from the latter by the retention of wcakened
forms of the endings in ail cases of ail llUnfi, ers whereas in
the -o- stems traces of the endings are found only in the
A.V. pl. lllaSc, and dat. pl. and dtla| lllttSc, and neut.
This is due to tbe -f- of the stem : thus K«fros gves fer,
but I,'eglios> céle ; «dligeti, dligetfi > dligid, dlig«d,
but k'ridi, k'riei6 > cridi, cridiu.
51. The declension of -o- and 4o- stems varies from the
original Id.G. iii the fol|owing particulars: the dat. sg. in
-t e.g. *firu, céliu is probably the Id.G. instrumental case
in -6; the gen. sg. masc. and neut. in q, common to
Italic and Keltic, is probably the Id.G. locative; the nom.
pl. toast, in -i<-oi instead of Id.G. -6s bas, like Gk.
and Lat., been influenced by the pronominal declension, |,ut
the genuine nom. pl. is retained as a vocattive, e.g. rime
from dr6s. The dual N.A. masc. should regularly bave
given fittr<l'ïrn<ir6 or tdirtd, hue the influence of
the invariably accompanying dd probably changed the -6 to
- and preVelltcd it from becoming -n; thus d(t %tir >
dd fer. The dual N.A. heur. causing nasalization instead
of aspiration show variation from the Id.G. vocalic ending.
3. -- and - stems. Feminines.
52. Id.G. and prehistoric Old Irish case-endin.
30
The noun ben 'woman' is declined: N.V. sg. be»t,
G. nnd < bd, D. mndi < bi, A. mdi < bn«[in ;
dual N.A. mndi < bnd£ G. bo, Ik mndib < bn.dib ;
l,lur. N.A.V. mtd < Cbd, G. hem, D. mndib < ¢bndib.
This is the only noun in which the declension follows the
original case-eudings of the -d- stems (except in the acc.
sg.) ; all other nomes of this declension bave been itlfluenced
by the -h, g- stems. Nouns lu -acht do hot undergo
palatalization, e.g. d6bcrc]t, G.sg. ddinachtae, D.sg. d6i-
ncwht, A.sg. ddiaclt '. In verbal nomes the dat. sg. form
is often used for t.he nom., e.g. g«tbdl or gabdil, both or
buith, bretl or brith. Some nouns in the sing. alternate
bctween the -d- and the -n- declensiou, e.g. bendachV
G.sg. beMachtae or bendadtan ; fortacht, A.sg. fortach,
t«dn as well as ]ortacht: per.an, G.sg. persine makes
N.pl. pe'i.
53. Examples of -d- stems : guide, 'prayer' ; bliadai,
' year. '
Sing. Dual Phtral
N.V. gtdde' bliada[n' gtddi' bli«M«it gtddi blidttai
G. guide bli««dnae g.ztide blir«dae gtdde n bliadn«e
D. gtddi' blidni' gtddib bl#td»tctib guidib bliadnaib
A. guidi'bliadnai " gtddi bliadain gtddi bliadnai
Like gttide re dcclined soil..e, mtgcte ; like bl[«da[n,
adm G.sg. a[dche, sétig G.sg. séitçhe. Some nouns infiect
the G.D. and A.sg. like -i- stems, e.g. ini., G. inse, ittseo,
D.A. it.i nd inis : othcrs follows this declension only in
the G.sg., e.g. néit, G. mgite, D. mit ; can6in, G. c«n6ne,
D. cat«Jin. Nouus of the type of bl[adain hd in the N.sg.
the ending in --; thus Id.G. bh2.g'ht , fera. of bh2"g'hont-
'exlted' = O.Ir. Brigit (i.e. 'exlted lady') = Skr. b'hatL
In the N.A. duel they bave the saine form s the N.sg. from
the influence of the -i- stems. In the N.V. plut. ll nouns of
31
this declension ha e adopted the tcrmination of the -i- stems.
4. -i- stems. All three genders.
54. Id.G. and prehistorie Old ]rish case-endings :
Sing. Dual Plural
m.&f. heur. m.&f. heur. m.&f. neut.
N. -i.% -is -i, -i -i, -i -i, -i çie.% -i -ia, -e
G. -i.i-os, -las
D. -i.i-ai, -e -ibh-, -ibt
A. -ira, -in -i, -i -ins(-.),-i -la, -e
Examl,les of -i- stems : mase. ct5im, 'hone'; fera. m[il,
'eye'; heur. rouir 'sea.'
Sing. Plural
nmsc. fen,. heur. masc. fera. neut.
N.V. otdim .s't'til .rouir
G. cndmo, -a .«t'do, -a utoro, -a cndmae'* ./dle n tordre n
D. cndim' s'til' »utb" c»dmaib .«ilib mdrib
A. cudbn n .t'dl'* "muh"* c»,dmai .st'dli .muh'e
Dual
,haSe. fera. neut.
N.A.V. «,dim .*iil
G. as sg. as sg. as sg.
D. as 1,1. as lfl. as pl.
Deviations from the original Id.G. deelension :
the N.A. neut. eause nasalization from the analogy of the
-o- and -n- stems ; the G. in -o (later -a) is borrowed from
the -u- stems, the G. in -ias being round in Ogham inscrip-
tions. Nouns like fi'ai, raig make gens. frega, grea;
bi«il makes its (I-. béla ; loanwords like abbgitir,
stOb', poMt, compatit, superlait, digaim show no ending
in the G.sg.
.5. -- stems. Masculine and neuter.
. Id.('-. and prehistol'ie Old Irish ease-ending :
34
The -9 of »'*'V lins a-qualit, y iii G.sg., pl. and dual, i-quality
in D.A.sg. aud N.pl. and dual.
Like nathir are declined cathi»,, 'city'; the proper
naine Lugaid, (. Luigdevh (Ogham Lugudecca.*) ; .ail,
"willow,' G..«ailech: like ab'e, the lwoper naine Aim,b'e,
G. Abtmivech ; a.ve, 'temlde,' G. arach; later also malae, f.
eyebrow,' G. malach, pl.D. mailgib: also the following
nouns ending in -u or -o, the proper names C(tant, G.
C(u'mach ; Eochu, G. Echach; céu (céo) m. 'nfist,' G.
ciach ; éu (go), m. 'sahnon' (gu< * e.oh <* es6ks.), G. iach :
like ,4, but with a short vowel, bri 'hill,' G. breg, D. brig ;
tml one doomed,'ld.N, troich, G. tvoch, A. t»'ovha.
Many nouns whose N.sg. ends in -r or -l have been
attraeted to this deelension; thus Temub" 'Tara,' ail f.
'rock,' dmo" (later da&) 'oak' have G. Temro, alo, daro,
hut later also Temvach, ailech, darach; even the --stem
ia.««l-athir 'Patriarch' bas I).pl. h(tasalathrachaib Wb.
30 d 1. The noun lie m. 'stone' is a stem in unlenited c
(i.e. gg), G. liac, 1).A.sg.,N.l,1. liait (later lii«). A.p1. leea.
Stems in a lenited dental (th, d).
58. Mase. and fera. only. Examples :" trai9 f. 'foot' fili
'poet'; tengae f. 'tongue.' (Pr.-Kelt. forms of noms. sg.
uncertain owing to analogical changes).
Singu]ar.
l,ike lrai.l are decliued :--
«i, m. 'fault' I}.A. «imM m,d cit, 1).Id. ciutaib, A. citta.
cig, m. 'wm'rior,' {. ciged, ciugelh.
mil, m. 'soldier,' G. miled, ]).ll. miledaih.
al, abb, m. 'ald}ot.' G. al»ad, D.l,l. aplhail».
si, 'sage,' aud dru[ 'druid,' make {. «aad, druad.
cré f. "eby' and dd f. 'smoke,' make {. c'iad, diad.
luth, f. 'mouse" makes G. lochad, l }.A. lot'heM, A.l,l. Io«htla.
Like fili is declined oii, 6egi m., 'guest,' {L oiged, Ad,l.
oigetla.
l,ike te,gae are declined a.«ae m., 'rivfl," 6. ascad, D.II.
ascadaib :teue m. amlf. 'tire," {I. leed, D. teMd and
(i.e. teiu) D.pl. tebtib niae m. 'nephew," G. iad (Ogham
»iotla<%ootas) (do 'chaml,iou,' . i,)th is probal,ly
the saine word); in later examples like ld[ue f. 'smock,'
and seh'le f. "hide,' the old -e aud-[ emliugs are uo louzer
distiuguishable. To this declcusion helong also abstract.
nouus in -tt<-tts e.g. oiMu, o[t;u, belhu ; similarly.
bibd** m. 'guilty lersoh ' coimmdiu m. 'lord," G. bbdad,
coimmded.
8ems iu -t (i.e. -dd<-t). mase. and heur.
9. Examples: ca'ae («karant.s) m. 'fl'ieud':
(d'e»,l.ç') m. 'tweuty'; ddt (»det < d}t) n. "tooth.'
h gular.
N. ca rae fiche dét"
G. carat fichet dét
l). caï'ait' flch it' dgit'
A. cab'ait ' fichit ' dét '
Y. carae'
36
Dual.
N.A. carait .fehit dét"
(4. .ca fa t fich et dét
I). cairtib, -dib fichtib détaib
Like earae are deelined ,dmae 'enemy,' b,'&.Iae 'lmCk,
md Iiada 'lord" with -a in N. : like fiche, abmme 'patience'
atd d[mt (»dêwnt.) ' '
lamb with -u in N.: trieba (pro-
bably older tri«hae) 'thirty,' coh'a 'fifty,' and secbtmogo
'seventy,' G. sechtmogat also belong to this dec]ension :
like dét is dec]incd b;ehet, ldebat 'lightning,' G. lochet.
The nasalization in sg. N.A. of ueuters is analogica].
Stelns in leuited -n.
60. Masc. and fera. only.
Exalnples: brithem m. judge ; toimtiu f. meaning -
ct m. hound.'
Singular.
toim tiu c{(
toh,te con
tohMin',-te,-tiu coin"
toimtin",-tiu coin"
cri"
coit
CO?
CO)t(l[b
Like britlzem are decliued nouns in -em and -ara, e.g.
,s'it«tem m. ' tope,' t«dm n. ' earth ' ; also, with -t-quality
of the final consonant, e.c«»g f. 'eel,' (. e.cog(tt, the
proper naine 3lilhtcc, çl. 3lilcot, brdtt (brdo, br6) ' quern,'
and in -e me»me m. 'mind,' (. menm«t»t; like tobntit
no[dit m. 'child,' fiadt 'wituess,' Mtmt f. 'Munster'
ge»itit f. ' genitive ' makes N.pl. genit»e.
Stems in uulenited -z.
61. Ail genders. Exanples : gobae n. 'smith '; ]vit f.
' h'e}and' ; cébn (kingsm») n. ' step.'
l)ual.
N.A. gobnbn (cgimm ')
(. ,.Iobant (rdimmen)
D (gobannaib) (rdimmenaib)
Like gobcte but with -t in X.sg. are declined drtt l.
'iduey,' obltt f. 'conseext.ed host,' aud 1-,roper names as
Attt, ('tialtt; like Eriu, b'itt f. 'land,' D. [finit or ire;
brt (&brtts) ï. 'womb'nakes G. brotn, I). broi»tt or
brt : 'étffltt 'star,' (. vét91ann, dual dt rdt9lainn, D.pl.
'étffl, mtaib. In fera. nouns the I). form in-eis somet.imes
used iustead of the N. e.g. ride 'flood' for d[li«. The
neuters forn their D.sg. in imm instet of bt»t tmder the
assimilating influence of the preceding -m- (-mm-) : that the
-mm is confined to the I).sg. is due to Pre-Celtic diflreuces
of accentuation (Marstrander. Eriu, Vol. V.), thus
38
change of -bot toimm is confined to neuter t,oms 1)eeause
hy far the greater number of stems in -men are neuter.
The noun ab» n. 'naine ' follows the n-flexion in the pl.
1,ut varies in the sipg. G. aume, I kA. comimm and aumaim:
arbor (arbur) n. corn' is m r-sem in N.A. s'., lm in the-
other cases i is deelined as an n-stem, G. arbae, D.
arbaimm, cf. lat. jëmur, .femiui.s'.
62. Nonns of relationship only. Examl,le: atbb" (pagêr)
Dual
N.A. ath"ir
athar
as in 1,1.
Like atkir are declined brdthir 'brother' and mdthb"
' nmther' ; thc -th- bas a-quality ail through the sg., in the
1,1. i has usually i-,luality lmg sometimes also a-quality as
in atbra : siur (%tes6»') f. 'sister,' with lenited anlau
tire" or phiw (i.e.g.cim'), makes G. setkar, I).A. ieir, sier
(later Mai»'), N.pI. s'etbir, D. (later) setkraib, A. (later)
setkracha after the analogy of eathracha, dual N.A. as in
D. sg.
Neuter s- stores.
63. Exanll,le : tech (+tegas) 'house.'
Sing. Plural Dual
N.A. tecb" (eg") tige tech"
G. tige (taige) tige ' tige
D. ,«ig' (tig) igib tigib
The irregular G.I}. sg. taige, taig beskle tige. tig are
probahly due to the analogy of uaige, maig. The nasa-
lization in N.A. sg. and dual is analogieal.
Like tech are deelined :
uag 'plain,' G. maige, D. uaig, muig.
leb ' side,' G. lehe, 1 . leiH,.
Similarly gle»m 'valley,' G. glimte, D. glinu : .liab
39
'mountaiu,' C..léibe, I). sléib; ,em 'heavell,' (. »*ime,.
D. tim : o ' cgg,' G. tte, I). ti : «'t, (6) ' ear,' G.
D. oi, de, I). pl. atib : prohably also ' cl't ' faine,' (*'. (later)
IRRE(ULAR +OUN S.
64. mi (*mên.q) m. 'month,' G'. I). A. sg., N.G. pl.
A. pl. »l.o, dua| N.A. mi. bi; (*bords) f. 'cow,' G. bd
(archaic bot), D.A. bobo, N. pl. btt[, G. b«' (bcto S.(. 22 b 11),
D. bt«r«ib, A. btl, du. N.A. bc«[ G.D. as pl. (c/in) 'day," G.
dici, A. dei, dé. Indeclinal)le are t«,fft«, -»'offre,
foreign names as Le.te, P«'ttricc.
FORMATI[)N OF AI:STRA('T. AND 1)iMINUTIVE.q.
A
65. From adjectives :
(a) suffix -e<-çi( (cf. Lat. nemor-itt), e.g. d[ct»t 'swift,
dé»t e 'swi ftn ess' ; fd ilid,-ith 'j oyou s,' fi ilte < * fi ilith-e ' j oy. "
(b) sux -t«t- (cf. Lat. imtentt«l-, (oth. mikil-dtt],..),
o.g. beo 'living,' beth« 'lire'; sldt 'healthy,'
health.'
(c) sux -tts<-es-t«-, e.g. bi»d 'melodious,'
melody' ; cos»m«il ' similar,' co.«.milit«s 'similarity.'
(d) sux -s<ç.td added fo nonosyllahic adjectives in
-lb, -d, e.g. gn5th 'custonmry,' ffnd. 'custoln'; 9olth
wise,' 9als ' wisdom ' (-th + s = -.'.' written -..).
Froln substantives :
(ci) sux-acht, -echt<-akt«t, -ikta (cf. Lat.
e.g. d[a, God,' dectcht ' divinity' ; .fli (G. filed) 'poet,'
filedctcht ' poetry' ; dobti pl. ' inen,' dobtechl and dobctcht
humalfity.'
(b) sux -ci.c. -e.ç' <-a..«, e.g. 6clach 'a youth,' 6clachas
youth ' ; t«»c«mcharae ' confessor,' atnmch«tirtes'.
(c) sux -b,e, -sine <-inict, -..titia, e.g. ctrae ' fl'iend,'
cai»'ddi»te ' friendship' ; fiith ' prophet,' fiiths.bte ' pro-
phecy': ai»tbthi»te<*atboth-bte 'storn' il collective sense.
4O
(d) suflix -red, -rad< 4/reth- ' to run,' as collective, e.g.
aig 'ice,' aigred; luaitb 'ashes,' luaitbred', gaim-red
winter-time,' sain-md 'summer-time '; as abstract, e.g.
»reclt 'variegated,' »recltred; carne, caratrad. This
suffix probably sl,read by analogy from words like ind-red
invasion,' ech-rad ' stud of horses,' in which it had etylnO-
logical significance.
(e) suflix -M, -tM, d, in nons of agency, e.g. d[gal 'ven-
geaace,' d[glaid avenger ; élned 'defiling,' élnitMd
defiler'; thc -tbid thus arising from -d (-5)+-id is also
used as a suflix, e.g. J'oghdmnt 'learning,' jbglimthid
learner.'
.ludnent, brit]em 3udge' ;
(.f), suttix-em, e.g. b,.eth .....
dgtil ereation,' ddilem creator.'
(g) the l,at. sutSx -drht.s which appears in early loan-
words as -ire and in later as 6if, e.g. notire (notariées),
laitndir (1,tinarins), is eml,loyed t.o form nouns of ageney
from natire words: e.g. te«ht 'going,' tecbtaire 'mes-
senger'; jbclell 'eare,' foi«hleoir 'eurator': the sufiix
-tdir, -atdir is also used after the analogy of loan-words
(e.g. wecept6ir, .enatdir); e.g. lnb-gort 'garden,' lubgar-
tdir ' gardener.'
])IM1NUTIVES.
(a) suflix cb,<-akno (ogham -agno in Corbagni,, &e.),
e.g. feî" ' nmn'.ferc'tn. ; dltble, ddndn : also -ca)çin I.ucdn
(b) sufix-én<-ikno, and-ée: e.g. duinén; claideb
' sword,' claMbéne ; ldir ' mare,' ldiréne.
(c) sut5x-at<-t:sim" 'sister,' s'i, tr-wat', t[r 'land,'
tb'-th-at ' little fie|d ' ceint ' head," cen-t-at ' capitulmn.'
SE OF TIIE CASES.
66. The genitive is used :
(a) adjeetivally ; 1,ossessi e, e.g. (onmi chie ' we are
God's': qualitative, e.g. ' "redite 'it is of importance';
41
objective, e.g. serc dé ' love towards (;od' : G. of respect,
e..amS precepte ' fearless as regards l,reaching.'
(b) adverbially : of rime, céne ' so loug as ' (X. c[«n '
long rime ') ; (h)5re ' hecause ' (N. iar ' hom'.')
The dative is used :
(a) after the preps, a, co ', d/, do, .f/ad, /cor, [s, 5 ; oc.
'e and after af, .fo, .fo-»', i, which take the A. also.
\Vithout a l,rel)osition.
(b) as il,strumental : c.g. lin cbrtlb o 'in this mauner,'
b«araib 'at rimes,' .cn-me.«.ib 'accor(liu" to old standards,'
léir b9mt 'with diligent science'; iii al,position,
tb-oem«r ' thou aloim' (lit. ' thou in thy one-man '),
tritss 'he as third,' (for adverldal use v. §
(c) as aldative: after comparatives, e.g. lift dii. no
tbrim" ' more than two or three 1,ersons.'
(d) as locative: .s.it 'here,' chm 'at the end of': of
rime. indiu ' to-day,' ind-e«bt-.o ' this rime' : possihly also
in the stereotyl,ed phrases .fri«.«tiret]ar «dill 'cultivates,'
ar.beir bitlh "l,artakes of,' ar.mtinethar fJid " honours.'
The accusative is used :
(a) after tlle 1,rel,s. cen, ce»tmithS, «o ('to'), echtar,
sechtar, etnr..fri, ira, le, s.ecb, tar, tri, ald after or, fo,
'br, i, which also take the dative.
Without a l,reposition.
(b) as ol,ject to a verb: also after vcrbs of motiou as
indicatiug the goal, e.g. tiavait b5a.'they go fo death,'
a mb«. t&,.lme-»ti ' the death to which we
(c) to deuote duratiou or time wheu: e.g. tri fichtea
bl&d»e ' foi" 60 years,' allae .i»t ' ou that day.'
(d) afterttmal hke, ' " " '
' " ' e.g. amal «hland(t hke chd(h'en ;
after the adjs. atlas and t'talanff (xvhich also takes the G.),
e.g. bid ada. .f(tr mbSi«b ' it will be proportionate to your
fighting,' ttalan(j forcital ' C,l,able of teaching.'
The vocative is always l,receded by the particle a
42
IV.--THE ADJECTIVE.
Practically ail adjectives have vocalic stelns, on|y a fe
traces rcmaining of the COlSOlmnta| stenls; they are
accordingly reduced to rive classes--I, o-5-st.ems, II. io-'5-
stems, III. i-stelns, IV. u-stems, V. consonantal stems
(Th lll'll. ).
FORMATION OF AD.IECT[VE.
67. New adjeetives are fornled in four ways :
1. From the present or pretcrite stem by lnealS of the
suffix %tio-, -tfl-t>-the (-te, -de,-.s) of transitive vcrbs
(passive participlc), e.g. mortbcte, ob'dnide, clnisse.
2. by suflix-less composition ; adj. + adj., e.g. dub-ht..s' ;
adj. +1101111, c.g. »,;r-che»m ; l»OUll + adj., e.g. folt-b,tide ;
particle or prep. + l»Olll, e.g. so-nirt, deithbir<de-(dthber;
1101111 + 1101111, e.g.
3. 1,y meal)S of the suflix -de (-d%)--(od-stenls), e.g.
emdae, bé.t«te, tu, trie (fol'-t"e v. 17).
4. by meal»s of the suffix -cwh, -ech--(o-5-stems), e.g.
ben-ctcb, «retmech<%retem-ecb---eçb bccause a palatal
COliS. ] wecedes.
N.B.--hl the case of 2, when thc fil'st part is au inde-
clinable particle, o- «lld (- StelnS pass over to the i- flexion,
e.g..qo+ceuq=so-cbeȎdl: in the case of 3 the auslaut
of the steln reappears before -rie, e.g. c{t---codcte, ab'e--
airechdae, airegde.
68.
l. o- 5- stems.
Siugulav.
nmse. fera. neut.
N. becc bec« becc '
G. bb'«', be&c" bee b&c', be&d
D. biwc" bi«e bi«cc'
A. beçc ' b&c becc'"
V. bloc', beh'e' becc b&c', beeec
43
Plur,tl.
N. bicc', beicc' be«cn becca
G. becc" be«c" bec«"
D. beccaib beccaib be«caib
A. biccu, bec«'a be«cn becca
As in the deelension of the article the neut. pl. forms
are lmt. distinguished from the fera. bug the shorter i.e. the
true heur. form oecurs where the adj. is used suhstantivally,
e.g. ima o1« 'the evils.' In A.V. 1,1. when used substanti-
vally the ending" -« is employed. In the I t. sg. m. n.
infection is sometimes lackin as in the case of nouns (v.
49). d[aat 'swift' makes (. m. n. débt, f. ddaw, I. m. n.
d[am f. débt ; olc 'had,' G. m. t«H«, 1. t/«, A. 1,1. t«lct« :
&&«, &éo ' living,' G.V.m. b& D. bh«, N. pl. m. b& A. b[t« ;
bocltt 'poor' makes G. sg. boh'ltt although the group chi
is non-palatal, l}issyllabic adjectives like [.s'el and t,a.al
are inflceted in the pl. like i- stems when hot. used sub-
stantivally, e.g.N.A, pl. t«ai..li, but (h) m«.«il (subst.).
2. io- !"e- stems.
69. Examples: amrae wonderful, tile ail.'
In pl. m. f. n. N.A.V. amrai tili; G. amrae",
D. amraib, ,iii& In the A.V. pl. m. when used substan-
t.ivally the ending is -u : there is no speeially subst, form in
1X'.A.V. pl. n. : aile 'other' and alaile 'another' make
N.A. sg. n. aill and alaill, do'clme is fouud as pl. of
dorclme ' dark' ; clé ' left " makes D. sg. m.
44
3. i- St.crus.
70. Example : maith 'good.'
Phlr«d m. f. n. N.A.V. uaitbi, G. maithe ' and maith ',
D. maithib. Trisylhd@ adjêetives undergo syneopafion,
e.g. N'.sg. .ainem(til, G.f. s.abemlcte, N. 1,1. s.ahtemlai,
D. »ai»emlaib : fmlmnab "deep" makes N.A. 1,1. fitdumne
used substantivally as against adjeetival fitdumuaL The
longer form of the ;. 1,1. is only used suhstantivally.
4. u- stems.
71. Eamplês :dub ' blaek,'.tbllus ' elear.'
Singflar.
PlurM N.A. dubai, .lbil.s'i : D. dubaib, fiilsib : other
cases hot round. These adjeetives follow the truc deelen-
sion of t- stems only in the N. sg. of ail gendêrs and in the
D.A. sg. m. n., the V. is uot fomld. In the ll. s. they
follow the deelcnsion of the o- & stems and in the 1,1. that
of the i- stems.
5. Cosonantal Stems.
72. The only certain examl)le is tee, té<:*tepeuts 'hot
an old t- stem which make N. pl. f. teït<*tepete.ç.
4.5
CO3[PARISON OF AI).IECTIVE.';.
73. The adjeètive has three forln. of "Oml,ariso riz..
'ceemparatïï'ë nd ««l The equa.tive is
orme«,y ]ueans of the sutE'" -iH,'r, -idir_(it,') : rb as
ae chang:es to hlted hy two or more weakly-
acccnted syllahlcs from the syllahle which hears the l,rin-
cipal stress, accordingly -idir is the forn of the sux usual
in adjectives of more thau one syllal,le, c.z. di««» 'swift,'
dddthir 'as swif ' ; soirb ' easy,' .oirbithir ' as easy' ;
bu s.uthab ' lasting," suth,inidi« ; s,m,ir ' srong,'
sonartaidir; mdr, m6r 'greaL nmkes e.q. moir; il
' mmy,' e.q. lit ; lctbnn ' hroad,' c.q. h'thMir.
N.B. Thc equativc is followed hy the A of thc nouu,
e.g. so»arlahlir sldbe (A. 1,1.) 'as stroug as nlountains.'
74. The com_arati.vç is farmed by addiue" to_he ositve
the sux -u : since tllis -« repl'esents earlier *-is<*i6s. it
causes, where possilde, palatdization of the final consouant
of the adj. e.g. tl[,», ddniu: sctt 'old," sbdu: with
syucopation, dli»M ' beautiful.' dildiu *dilndiu : fiiilid
'joyous,' fiiilliu: but ord 'hi'll.' ardu ; lromm 'heavy.'
trummu ; c«machlctch 'powerful,' cumachtchu : for the
del,alatalization in doich, docht«, c,;bç cdru, &c., v. 22:
llet the positive ends in a owel the vowel disal,l,ears
belote the sux, e.g. t,«»e, ass.c, comps, tanu, a.mt. The
final consonant of the positive frequeutly retaius its non-
palatal quality in the eOnll,aratve also, e.g. irlam 'ready,'
b'lamu : rid 'just,'flridm«.
75. The_supel;lative is formed by addinç the suflix
-em<oe-isamo=: cf. La...-issimus or, after cousonalits
whiell do no adnlit, palatalization,-ara: e.g. soirb'easy,'
soirbem ; follu. ' clcar,' faill.em ; but ct.s.e ' diflicult,'
aïts.«o»t : in the MI. glosses his sufïfix appears doubled, e.g.
somme 'rich,' «ommaimem : lïrid, firid»amam : uasal,
itaiMimem.
46
76. Pos.
il ' many'
lethan ' broad '
m«b', mSr great
5ae ' ymmg'
.'[r ' long '
lrén ' strong '
Irregular Coml,arison.
Comp. Snperl.
l& hot found
letha hot found
m6 (m6o), md (mdo) mda,n (mdm)
With comparative and SUl,erlative formed ff'oto other
roots tlmn the positive.
becc ' little' lugu (la/g/u, lmtg,t) l-ugam (lugimem)
maith 'good' ferr de«h (deg)
olc ' bad ' me..qa hot round
77. Comparatives and sul,erlatives are indcclinable.
When the pronom, adj. or an indefinite noun follows a
eoml,arative it. takes the dative case, e.g. diliu alailin
'dearer than another," mai.it maenib ' more lovely than
riches'; the more usual construction is with ol" (in MI.
also in)+ the subst, verb .tdu (-16), e.g..o('h'udiu old6-sa
"more beautiful than I (ara),' Jbr" oldSi ' better than thou
(art),' Miu oldate angil 'lower than (are) the angels.'
' The more' is expressed hy means of de ' of it,' e.g. ferr de
'the better of it,' digthMiu de 'the more tobe feared.'
'and ' in sueh exl,ressions as 'greater and greater' is reu-
dered by as.sa whieh eaused gemination, e.g. m6o a..a m6o,
me.s.s«t (ts,'«tm»t#,.u(t ' WOl'Se and worse.'
ADVERS.
78. Adverbs are formed by using the D. sg. m. or n. of
the adj. with the article, e.g. in bhtcc ' little,' 5 mat (m6r)
'grcatly,' bt deurb 'surely': adjectives in -de and parti-
ciples in -the bave adverl)ial forms in :M, -ith instead of the
dat. e.g. oindae 'single,' ind obMaid 'singly,' bdstae
'mortal,' in bdstaid 'mortally': the later method of
forming adverbs by prefixing cO n is rarely employed, e.g.
comm6»', commenic, commaith (this gemination after co
47
instead of nasalization is ln'Obably almlogical). Com-
paratives and superltives are used dverbially hy means
of the D. sg. of the article, e.g. int serbu 'more bitterly,'
ind lugu 'less,' in maam mostly. Some adjectives are
used a.dvcrbial]y prefixed to verbs, e.g. ca[n..te»radar
may he guard-well,' mtrd.génatar 'haply are they' (lit.
'well-horn were t.hey,' mad.bocht 'it was well-reaped';
moch 'early'in the form mos, mw¢ is so used to express
'soon,' e.g. mos.riccub 'I shall soon-come,' mos.reg«te
' thou wilt soon-go.'
79.
1 obr-, den- 30
2 ddu (d6) 40
3 tri
4 cethir 50
5 cdic' 60
6 sé « 70
7 secht ' 80
ocht ' 90
9 oi ' 100
10 deich ' 1000
V.--THE NUMERALS.
(,ardmal.
tricha, G. trichat
cethorcha, G. cethorchat,
N. pl. cethorchuit
co[ca, G. coicat (cdecat)
se.,'c«, G. se.c,t
sechtmogo, G. sechtmogat
ochtmoga, G. ochtmugat
rdcha, G. rdchat
cét, G. c(it
»1 ile
20 fiche, G. fichet 2000 dl m[li (dual)
oin- (de»t-) as adj. only OCCtlrs in compounds ; it is some-
times Iound inflected and then follows the declension of adjs.
of o-d-stems, e.g. inna oetrméite (G.sg.f.) 'of the saine
size': the form ddu (dd) is only used when no subst.
follows as in counting, and when the numerals are so used
they are preceded by a geminating l)articlc a, e.g. a ddu,
a tri, a ocht (pron. a hocht and so written in Mid. and
Mod. I.); its composition form is dé, e.g. de-.illabach
' dissyllabic' ; the form used before suhsts, is dd, f. d[, and
is declined as follows :--
N.A. dd' di' dd '
G. dd' dd' dd '
dib ' (deib'q
4
trl bas as COml,osition form tré (tri, tre), cethir bas
ceth«»" and cethr- ; tf[ and cethir are declined thus :
IllaSC. fellli heur.
N tri cethir teoir, teora celheoir, celheora tri' cethir"
G. tri" (cethrd ) leora" celheora ' tri"(cethre '
D. trib ( ceth »lb) teoraib cetheora ib trib ( cethrib )
A. tri cethri teora cetheora tri' cethir"
c6ic and sg cause nasalization in the G., oclt nasalizes
after the «malogy of secht; cét is declined like a neut.
o- stem (v. 49), mlle f. like guide, (- store), fiche,
tricbae &c. are dett:d stores. The numerals 1119 are
built up by addiug dëac to 6en, dSu, tri, &c., e.g. a tri deac :
when used with a noun the noun fs placed between the t«vo
numerals, e.g. tri mis deacc ' thirteen months,' coic sailm
sechlmogat '75 Psahns': after 20 the numerals are con-
nected by the 1,rep. ar (foll. by ]k), e.g. oen af fichit ' 21,'
ficle ar cher ' 120,' note also b6 af hit ' 21 cows.'
7th 8echtmad lOOth cétmad
cét<-'»l,'entt (cf. Gaulish cbttugnatus 'first-born," W.
cynt), while cét 'a hundred'<kanton, is only used in
compou.uds, e.g. in cét-fer; cgtnae (.- stem) is used
adjecti,'ally, e.g. cétnae fer; whên it follows the noun it
means saine,' e.g. in. fer cétnae 'the saine man ' : 6enmad
is used inste«rd of cdtnae before the tens, e.g. 6enmad af
déc, ar ficlit'llth, 21st.,' ind 6enmad rann ficlet 'the
21st part.' As a verbal l,refix it trkes the form cetu (cela,
cita) e.g. cetu--ru-pridach 'bas first-pre,nched,' cela-déni
'does first,' ad.cita.acae 'saw first.' tdn.ai.e follows its
noun, ala (aile) precedesç before the nom, with or
without the art. aile beeomes ala aud remains uninfleeted :
49
the ermination -mctd is a coml»ouud of the endings -amo +
-eto ; he ending -amo- was origiually confined to .eehtmad
and decbmad (cf. Lat. «eptumu.., decumu.) and afterwards
Spl'ead through analogy : c6ieed has the ending -eto- alone,
«issed the saine euding flu'ough aualogy. Some of the
Lat. ordimfls were also borrowed, e.g. l»'[m-ab.t«tl, sec»td-
cil, b, and in grammatical phraseology tert-cobeda», 'third
declenson.
Cljugtiol,' q«a»'t-dtll ' fourth " '
'I'31EAI I'BSTANTIVES.
81. k«thcul 'oue thiug,' d&le, trdde, ceth««vdae, .édc,
«Cht«te, '2, :g, &c. things'; the forms for 5, 8, 9, 10 do
hot oecur (later «5i,'dc, dcb'bde). For pcrsous are used the
following forms whi«.h, with the exceptiou of db., are the
c«r(linals compounded with Jet 'man': obav, (,iomr), G.
,»Smir, D. o[»ntv ; d?«s f. G. dess.e, D. dS, cHi.c, (d[.), I). pl.
desMb : trias': cethrav ; c6icer : se..er : mor;fe.er (lit.
gre«t-sx ) : ocht««r : n6nbor ; dei,'he»&or.
82..! =leth (n. -o- stem), G. leith, also used in com-
pouuds; =t»'i?t» u. 1). trit»; -=celhr««mthu f. (.
cetbr««mthan ; from onwards the ordimds are employed
either alonc or with r««n poErt," e.g. coced=, .ecbtm««d
ron» = ;. Multiplicatives arc formed by the prep. Jo with
the A. e.g. jb dl 'twice,' Jb thr[, 2b deich, 2b o«ht ficher
'twelty-eight times.' 5e»z/e«ht is used for 'once.' I)istri-
butives are formed by prefixing cach, e.g. cach o[» 'each
one,' cach dd, cnch c6i«'ev Ac. c«wh-lo<cach«dc« "every
other, 'every second,' e.g. c««ch-la .el 'alteruately.'
VI.--TH F. PRONOUNS.
83. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Sing. Plut.
I ,,,é (messe, me.ve) we sni (sis,i,
thou tï (tusu', tumt) sinni,
he d (bd, d soin (simn)) ye si (sib, sis.ci,
she .ï (sisM)
it ed' (hed, ed 6n) they (, neut. é
d
5O
The N. of the 1st. pers. corresponding to Lat. «go, (,k.
i,/,,;, Skr. «dtdm is lost, rué being an oblique case (cf. Lat.
ne, (Ik. èlé, Skr. m). The longer forms (those in paren-
theses) are êmphatic; they are produced either by the
addition of a demonstratire particle .e, ..c«, so»,, ..6n or by
reduplication of the pronoun itself as in the 3rd f. and 1st
and 2nd pl. The . of .M may be borrowed from the
original verbal ending of the 1st pl. %mo., thus --»io.-i[-
--mo-s»l, or may haro arisên from the -« of the 3rd sg. of
the copula used with it, e.g. ¢is n.i-i. cM: si 'ye' cornes
from -.ui (W. «liwi) and thc reduplicated form sib (i.e.
ifl) < if< "xs»fi-.4y (cf. XV. ch wyc]ilci) : the persons of the
rerb are emphasized sinlilarly, e.g. 1st sg. «tsbiur sa, 2nd
sg. a..bir siu, 1st pl. a.beram ni, 2nd pl. a«berid si.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
84. Sing. 1st pers. »lo' (-mu') ; 2nd do' (du') : 3rd in. and
a', f, a : ; lhn ". 1st ar" ; 2nd far ' (for"}, after a prep.
ending in a vowel or -r also bar ' (i.e. flav") ; 3rd a' for ail
genders, mo cornes from an apoeopated (I. nen<-»lne»w
(er. O.V. »iyn) but aspirates after the analogy of do; a'
eomes from a form with voealie auslaut -e.si.o, a « <-e.a.,
a<e.sian ; ar and fc«r', b(w probably <.sara and
:».%««r«m old C-s. pl.
ACCENTED 1 ORSI .'.;.
Sm. 1st mu mme, emphatic mids..e, with art. imi««m-
md sea (pl. n.) cf. French les »iens; 2nd -tu[ (Mid. I.
lai) : 311 sg. and pl. ai (ae), e.g. a i-cti ' its' (art. + n. sg.),
cecltctr .l,-at 'each of thêm'; pl. Ist ,ctthaï" (n«r) in thc
phrase cecbtctr nat]iar (n«r) ' each of us two' ; 2nd s'etllar
(.,dr).
After preps, which end in a vowel and after for the
proclitic forms mv, do become -m, -t, e.g. dom, lat, fort;
before a vocalic anlaut or before lenited f t.hey may become
m-, t-, e.g. »io ort or m'off 'my diguity,' m'oL.itiu (foh
sitiu) 'my confession,' t«lr .mo du'mi or t«lrm cllenn (lit.
' over my hêad ') ' on my accourir.'
INFIXED PRONOUNS.
85. The 1,ersonal 1,ronouns are termed " infixed "' when
they are elosely attaehed to the verbal fovms 1,y me«tns of
certain 1,roelitic pavticles. This method of incorl,orating
l«'ononns is hot l,eeuliar to Celtic but is common to snch
widely separated langnages as asque, Zuhl, and the
aneient Accatlian; cf. also the transition stage in French
i,ndi (spoken for il me dit). The infixed 1,ronom is
usually in the ace. case, i.e. :ts ol,jeet of a transitive verb
whether active or deponent in fovm ; but with passive foans
the 1,tons. of the lsL and 2nd pers. are used to exlwess t.he
sul_,iect, and with the verb 'to be' the t,ron, is usnally in
the dative. Wht, n the infixing" partiele ends or oviginally
ended in a vowel the pvons. «tppear in reduecd fowns; after
those which end or origin«dly ended in a consonant, and in
relative sentences, longer forms are retaiued. In relative
s,mtences there is a special form for the 3rd sg. m. and n.
Shot'ter frms. Longer forms.
g 1 -re(m)-' Sg. " I-clora-(»)-' (-dura-)
2 -t-' "2 -dot-" (-dot-')
2 -b- (f) "2 -dvb-, -d«tb- (-dib-)
Eaml,les o he shorter orms : ff-m-eho'ot ' they love
me hot': to-t-beb" (i.e. to-t-efi) 'it brings thee' ; 'alléie
< ro-an-lei« 'he has left him,' '-an-uc < .'o-oz-tte ' he has
hrough him," n[-n-«dthg&ti "he did no recognize him ' :
du-sn-odbot " he shows her,' du-s-yt[<«lu-sn-yt[ ' he
makes her " ; '-a-ehualato'<'o-a-chmd«tto" ' they havë
heard it,' ater ni the -a- disat,l,ears luit the aspiration
remains, e.g. ff-thabo'<f-a-thbur 'I do hot give it' ;
ro-n-*oh" ' he has saved us' ; ,'o-b-cctv ' he has loved you ' :
the 3rd pl. or ail genders has the saine forms as the 3rd
s,.. f. e.g. ,to-sn-gm'd 'he i,rays them,' fo-s-didmot 'they
will str then'
52
Examplcs of thc loger foc'ms: the final consona.t of
fi'i(th), co» (c»), (d, oith. &c. unites with the initial d-
to l,roduce -t- (v. 17), f»itsmm,»'cat f».ith-domm-orc.t
'they ofli.nd me,' »n-dm-(.h'och«« ' who crcifies me,'
dom-5é»'«t (i.e. /3é'a) 'which will hring me'; ottot«ig<
(«d-dot-aig 'which iml»cls thec'; n,o-da-p'Mch« (i.e.
bvMeha) ' who l,rcaches it (lit. ' him '),' tu-dn-e'b««i ' who
entrusts himself,' rcl. ,d-idn-«»p««;»" 'who sacrifices him-
self,' fl«mtd»'og«b < *fo-««»t-d-'o-gob ' in which he hs
uttercd it (lit. ' him ') ' ; ««ta»'imet<*ad-da-r[met 'they
cotmt hcr' : atbei" (i.e. /3«i»') <*««s-dbei" ' he says it,' rel
cm«d c«.sindhim'<*««s-i(t)d-bim (b = ff) ' as I say it,' here
thc t of the naslizing relative-clause is inscl'tCd before the
d of -t'd- ; .f»'-don-ç«5t ' ho teaches us,' to-don-te'ta ' who
strcngthens us ' : fo».-dob-mot'tet««v ' they envy you,' h6'e
nom-dob m«»lo»" ('el. n },efore -dob-) 'because I praise you
««ta««tmlihhl <*a«l-da-.s«nliid ' ye will imitate them,'
da-se(«'« "vho sep«u'ates them,' with gemiuation
mmo[dct "in which they l)oast thcmselves'; the excep-
tional asl,imtio, ;fter -da - in n«,-da-c/el(«t, m-da-«hd'lti
(Ml.) is xplaiued l»y Thurueyseu s arising from forms
without infixed l»'ons, e.g. tte('heiltis. Aftcr the negative
(«('h the forms appear as sg. l.-ira-,-ara-, ; 2.-it-,-at-,
: m. -n- or mCXl»ressed f. -(«- n. -id-' or merely aspiration :
pl. I -it-, -««t- ; 2 -t'b-, -ab- : : -ce- : e.g.
' does hot console me,' tc«ch-im-;idmT)««i ' tht he has hot
cast me away'; taeh-it-vStd««ithev ' that thou be mt cast
«way,' nc««]t-st-toseélfit 'that they will hot experience
thee'; «ot-tac]t-n-itgéuic 'so that he did hot recognize
him, uuexpresscd e«m-n«ch-moideo ' that he )oast hot him-
self'; ('«m-tc«c]t-s-d«bmig.fe(« 'so that he will hot bestow
it (lit. ' ber ') ; n«('h-id-cht«d«tat" ' who bave uot herd
with aspiration only nach-beiv (i.c. flei') 'who does hot
1)rig it'; na«h-in-roffba 'that it seize us hot."
soie'cci 'that thou dost ot delivcr us'; nach-ib-e'pid'do
hot eutrust yourselves'; a'-nach--mo[det 'that they
boast not themselves.' In W1). the forms
are round, in Ml. thosc in -a», -al,
Exml»les of thc dative vith the verh 'to he'-
d-m-tld ' I have hot' (lit. ' there is not to me'), ro-t-bia
thou shalt bave' (lit. 'there shall be to thee'),
' we have hot,' o-b-td 'you have'; but (accusativc)
' I ara hot,' »H-n:fil 'we are hot,' ti-s! 'thcy are hot' (v.
suhstantive verb).
Eamples of 1st and 2nd pers. as sul4]ect with passive
f«n'ms : o-m-gl(cntar ' I ara cleaned,' to-n-lbta»" ' we are
filled,' ro-b-h[c(td 'ye bave been saved.' Wheu no conjunct
l,article or prel,osition l,recedcs the verb the particle
is enlploycd to iufix the I)l'onO(lllS. The infixcd I,ron. is
frequently used prolel,tically, c.g. d--gdtt-.«t si» ' I do that'
(lit. 'I do it that'), dtt-ds-jbrs«tl itt»ta dli 'who has created
the elements' (lit. 'created lbe,»t riz. the elcments') : the
ncut. pron. may refer to a noun of another gcnder, e.g.
r-s:fitir crctim 'ho lcnows it riz. thc fiHth (f.)'; it is con-
stantly infixed in the verb «tt.bnil<ml-db«dl'hc dies'
and usually in .Ibrt'gillim 'I guarautee,"
l,erishes,' and imms-(ticic "hc suits'; wheu infixed in
ro.gab 'he has taken' in nasalizing relative Seltences it
changes the meaniug of this form to ' he is,' ro»d-g«tb. In
the verbs fo.]èra and resta (do.e.'-t«t) it has the force of a
neut. rel. pron. e.g. M.era<fo-d:I'r«t 'whieh causes,'
do-d-esta 'which is lacking." After chi 'although' and
ma 'if' with their negatives cei, ,mtm -d-' is infixed
l»efore verbal forms in the indicative which bave no iufixed
pronoun, .g. «[a d,d.«'hommttr "although we went.,'
ceni-d-felar-.a 'although I (h hot know,' met dwd-rigdtt.s"
'if I have done,' »ttttti-d chretid 'if yc do hot belie e.'
. AFFIXED )RONOUN,'q AFTER THE ('OI'I'LA.
These are added to the 3rd sg. of the copula, e.g. i«.-um
t:«en 'it is nccessary for me,' i«-a(t) dilm«dt, d-b éce}t,
i«s-id n-ait/t reçh.
7. SUFFIXE ['RONOt'N.
After verbal forms :
Suflixed l«'OnOUnS are found after the :h'd sg. and 1st and
3rd 1,1. of simple active verl,s : the forms arc--
5
do ' to'
dom, data
dtit: (lait
deit, dit
f[ad 'ilt i,l'esence o[': sg. 1 fi'adam,
jïadaib.
{ad, gtaid
adi
/taib
[aidib (ddib)
pl. 2 jïadib, 3 fiadib,
55
Prepositions with acc«sative.
89. fi'i ' against' la ' with' tri, t«e ' through'
Sg. 1 ri'Jure,,,, frira le,,,(,,,), lira(m) tri, o,,
lium(m)
2 frit, frhd lat triat
: m. n. fris'(») leis.s, le.(.), lai. triit, triit
f. fi'ie lee, laee, 1,b tree, trée
Pl. l ri'bru, fi'i» li»m, lem trim (-ni)
2 frib lib triib
3 ri'lu leu, lé,, leo trett, tréu, lreo
Sg. 1
2
.q
lethu (BI« of Arm.)
Pl. 1
3
samlom, 2 (sa»dut), 3 m. 11. samlid,
S.amlilh, samhtid, l,I. 3 s.amlaib
cen without': sg. "2 cemff, 3 ni.. n. cene, cetae, pl. 2
cemdb, 3 cemib
sech 'past': sg. 1 (.sechum), 2 (.echuO, 3 m. n..echae
f. (.ecce), Id. 3 .eccu
tar, dar'over': sg. 2 torut, 3 m. n. tarai.,., f. (tair.,.e),
1,1. 1 torture, 3 tairsiu
The pèculiar reduplication of the prep. ctwum,
&c., is possibly due to the analogy of ocum, octd. &c
(Thurn.).
Pvepositions with dative and accusative.
90. i ' in' Jbr 'on' af ' for'
Sg. 1 indium(m) form airi,m, e um
2 bdiat fi, rt crut
3 I). m. n. and
f. i»tdi fidri, fi«ri
A. m. n. ind foir, fait airi
f. ite jbrrae
56
1. ] NTERROGATIVES.
Substantival forms :
Sg. N. m. and f. cla, n. cid ; pl. N. «itné ; (. coi«h : cht
«md cid are followcd by the relat.ive form of the verh : e.g.
,'la ratures ' Who dividesT, cM asr,&art ' What has he
aid ', bMerb coA'h i mag 'it is uucertain whose slave
he is,' citȎ robatar ' What were they ?'
Adjectival fonns :
Sg. m. cla « ; f. ce-.s.ï, ci-M' ; n. ced', cid' : pl. all genders
«it«d : e.g. c[a ffn5» 'What deed ?', ci.[ (.hvmairle 'What
advice?', «ia «]wtdl ' What kind ?', citd briathra 'What
woMs?': in certain stereotyped phrases c[a (ce) is
found for ail genders, e.g. c[a-umgit, ce-redit (f.) 'Ho
great?': c[a b,das, c'it, da. 'In what mamer How'
c[a is also found intensified hy the addition of doo ' then."
The oblique cases are expressed by means of the preposi-
tions, e.g. c[a du ]orvmn 'to what end ', c[a in olcaib
"in what evils ?', cia dtt ,e,wh 'to whom ?'
In coniunction with the col,ula m. ce-, n. ci-, e.g. ce-bad,
ce-ptar, c@ad, c-ip.
The forms cote, catte, pl. coteet, cateet, cateat, are found
in the sense of ' in what consists' ; e.g. cate in fi'rime ' bi
what consists the righteousness?', cateet diuitiae sm,d
" What are dhdtiae here ?'
INTERROGATIVE IARTICLES.
The partiele bP (ira before b) is used to introduce a
direct or indirect question, e.g. b*-dnccatar (t,wcatar),
ira-hem: frequently an indirect, question is introduced by
57
dfis, d(tu.s, (i.e. do J'us) + in =' to know whether,' e.g. du{s
in-comalnid, d6u.s i. itamlitis. In a double question
either the in is repeated or m«»ther l,artiele fi (bec. bd) is
used, e.g. im-bem imbethu, ira-hem, imbdas 'whethcr wc
be in life or in death,' i»t duit fi;b fit do
'whcther it is for thyself or for solne other pcrson,'
damso[Jhd fit-nacc ' whether he would deliver me or hot ' ;
fit is really part of the copulm Negative interroffatives :
b-md, im.[ (rttre), i-Mmdd, ('«oi (cbff) ('«ti belote
lwetonic -fo ; all expect ;ua trmative answer, e.g. in-mhl-n
-««çai or ea»i.aeç«ti ' I)«»est thou uot sec ? ',
thou uot slay?', in-l md-r(,ilg2id'll:tve )c hot reml?',
«(th-ro.o[b,d ' llas ho ot heel sanctificd?': the Imzali-
sation of i»F' is carried o er the negzttive ndd
as also halq»ens at times tftct- the Colmla. e.g.
m-briethra 'Is it the Wol'ds?' v. 15.
9. I')EM( »N,'4TI(A'I'IVE [)RON( »UNS.
O (set, se)and silt m'e uscd as ncutcr accusativcs after
prepositions and the equative t»f adjs. :dem»dthirso 'as
sure as this,' demtithir sit;co-se 'hithcrto,' co.in 'so
far': as 1). sht, sbt, e.g. de-Mu 'from here'; after com-
pal'ative m6a sin ' greater than thtt ' : s[t without a lwep.
means 'here, in this world' as contrasted with
' ytmder, in the othcr worhl " : N. and A. for ail genders,
i.o (hse), i.in ; i. hWinso, i si
The atml»horic pronotm side.
N. only in the l,hrase ol suide ' quoth he,' ; sg. 1). m.
suMiu, f. mtidi; A. m. suide, n. sodaiq f. suidi: 1,1. D.
suidib, A. m..uhliu : enclitic forms, sg. N. m. side, »ede ;
f. «Me, ade, ede. A. sidi ; n. side : pl. sidi, .sMe, adi, ade :
.exalnples, do mtidia 'o him,' la su&li 'with her,' la sodctht
' therewith,' m6o suidiu "more thau that' ; cnclitic é-.hle,
'[-ade, =' he,' ' she,' Clul»luttie, a b'es-.shli ' his fitith ' (i.e.
the fait.la of this l,articular l,crson), ¢t 6ilde ode "her
l»euty,' sttmlalhttc-Mde'he imitates,' .mal
«idi ' as they do.'
94.
1 fiit, ./'.déin, «éin, «adCn je.iue,
2 .të'i,.t,léi fdi.sne, .fé.in, fctdékne,
{ III. !1..[é.s.iu, .lëin, .fitde.iu, .t6s'ine, Jë&ne, fe.it, fitdei.ne
«.e.,in, «.ade«in
f. jë.ine, Jëi.ne, .fitdi.s'in
«adés.in
Thcse fol'mS are eoml,oumled of
/) or «ia, «id ' though" (reduced to «ad, «-) + a pers. ],ton.
3rd sg. m. f. 1st, 2ml, and 3rd I,l. + a demonstrative (v.
}'edersen V. G. 153). The e}eal'eSt fornis etymohȍically
are 31'd sg. m. n. fi«d«.bt<td-é-sin or
<'j?t-#.in or "fa ed-.in, «adesin
< "Jtd-ç.s.in ; pl. 1.
2. fadi.in <'fad-.bin but. following analogy of 3rd sg. f. ;
3. fitde.in, cadesin < fa##.in, ¢('id-e-sin. In the sine.
the fOl'lllS fol' thc ls and 2nd pers. were origimdl3
::rd 111. ll.
Examl,les : rué .féin 'myself,' mo .s.,ithçtr fdit 'my own
work,' mu teIma céin. 'lny own lnilld '; tt .féil! 'thyself,'
deit jëbt 'to thyself,'
.&desin ' his own body' ; h6adi fiul&in ' from herself " ;
dtot «hani.sbt' o ourselves,' frinn fanis.in or
"against ourselves' ; daberid-..i fdksne 'ye yourselves give
it. ' : , fili.fé.ine ' heir OVll 1,oet.'
9 INDEFINITE IRONoV.N .%
necl < e-/?'o.% N.A. e«h, u. roT, G. nei«h, i). eu«h,
neoch, n. du, neo (MI.)'anyone, anyt.hing,' in ol'igil
negative: e.g. ni-Jël ech 'fllere is liO one,' doevg«tiri
neç.h 'for the forbidding of anything'; followed l»y
relative sentence, do euçh as dorahl 'eoncerning wlmt-
over is dicult.'
The proclitic fovms NE. mch. n. «t , G.m. tab'h, f.
na«htt, A. m.f. nach", n. ud. are used adjcetivally ; e.g.
na«h oib 'some saint,' ai«h baill 'of some menaber,'
naa«h rainne ' of SOlUe 1,ar (f.) " : i»efore a relative sentence
59
ni frequeutly becomes an[ or m-u: e.g. «tn[ «t.
a-n[-téte 'whatever it cornes to': thc ld. nacha is only
nsed in negative sentcnces, e.g. nSb«td mçh. ««vm aili
' let it hot he any othcr arms' ; for positive alaili is used
necht.r=" one (of two),' ne«bt.r n-di " cithcr of them.'
cch < +k"Sk"o.' N. l ). A. c5¢'h, G. relit'h, ' everyone ' ;
bcfore a relative verb with the art. e.g. in cSchjbr'amit[ev
"everyone on whom thou passest julment." in «hSh'h
«retes "of everyone who bclicves.' Proclitic adjcctival
forms ca,'b, cech. (.f. ca«ha, cee/m, n. cab'h; pl.
cecha, ,'ach. ,'e«h, c.g. ca«h ball "cvcry mcmher,' «e«ho
dethhlnc, ' ail carcs." hi «'o«ba per.'a»,ib ' in ail l,'rsons' ;
distrihutivcly with the numcra.ls, «a«h o5« 'cach one,'
('ach d«i 'cvcry two,' &c.: with G. of 3rd pers. -f lron.
,'ach de 'cach of thcm." ce«ht««r='caeh (of two),' e.g.
«e«ht, r in dd rann ' each of the two l,arts," ce«ht(«r n-ni
'cach of thcm (two).'
aile <+al'os, N.A. sg. n. aill, is uscd suhstantivally after
the art. or mwh : c.g.m, int aile. f. iM aile, n. a
n-aill 'the othcr': mwh aile " some othcr' : the indcfinitc
subst, form is m.f. alaile, n. alaill, uncontractcd G. sg. f.
abc aile, (. l,l. ala n-aile, X. 1,1. in s.I;. ala-aili :
X.B.--alaile with a noun='certain, some," but also
"another,' e.g. di-alailiu dilgud 'of another forgiveness':
alailial, ili= 'someothers,' ind al,--al, ile " the ont
the other.'
96. ADVERP, S oF PLACE.
.od ' bere' il-lei, il-le, ' hither'
toll ' on that side ' i»m-«mn ' to that side'
tta. ' above " .«ta. ' upward '
tL* ' helow ' si l ' downwards "
tait ' east ' .(tir ' eastwards '
thtr ' west ' .¢#," ' westwar, ls '
te.,» ' south ' sa-de.,." [ ' southwards '
jh-(lc.
sa-tb,iaid ). 'northwar,-ls"
tSaid ' m)rth " fit-tb&dth
6O
Advcrbs of Plaec--contbmed.
de-.4it
an-MI
hellee.
from thag side.'
ff'oto above.'
from below.'
from the east.'
from the west.'
an-de.. ' froln the south.'
an-tt'aid ' ff'oto tbe north.
te., is fornled after the amdogy of tdaid; .s.e«htair=
"out of,' an-e«htai»" 'from outside.'
97. IIELA'rtVE ,,ENTENCES.
The relative is expressed in the following ways:
(et) by neas of thc demonstrative .a",
befm'e a lal,ial) after a preposition; .s.a ' stands for ail
genders, cases, and nunbers ; e.g. m.-n-dént«t« ' for
which is ruade,' jwan-d-vo.gab 'in (lit. 'under') which
he bas uttered it," tre-san-&catav 'through which
are saved'; it is hot eml,loyed after in" or after a
negative, c.g. in-atreba "in which he dwells,'
«onbi 'of whieh he has not '; .a" (.anl), ¢tz (aïn) changes
to .sin, 8ira (in, iïn) heforc the d of t, he infixed pronotln
and the 3rd sg. -d and -b (-p) of t.he copula except in
dian-, ./ban-, dag-, e.g. ar-in-(I-el)ev 'for whieh I say it,"
t.e-sin-(1,-bia 'through whieh they shall have' ar-im-t2
ut st.
(b) 1,y the relative fOl'mS of the verb whieh al'e found in
3rd sg. and lsb and 3r(l pl. of simple vcrbs in the absolute
flexion, e.g. bere.s 'xllo bears.' beirme 'whieh we bear,'
bette 'who ]»ear.' In the pass. aud dep. the conjunet
forms are used as relatives.
(c) by prefixing 9o to the 1st aud 2nd sg. and 2nd pl. of
the pres. ind., pres. suli, and fut. of simple verbs, e.g.
no-guidimm ' what I l,ray,' m»thechti ' which thou
possessest,' no-bevid 'which ye earry.'
(d) by infixing a relative elenlent whieh appears
61
a', or mercly leuition, e.g., imm-e«'huretar 'who C;ILITy,'
ar-a-thd 'which is lcft,' no-cbnirigur 'what ] blamc,'
ad-«bess 'what was seelJ.'
98. I.EITIXt; IELATIVESEXTENCE.
(et) Ila 3Il. alid S.(. the anlaut of relative fornls is
lenited, e.g. int[ cb,».««s 'he wh«, loves,' (tn( «hantts 'what
sHgs.
(b) The absolute forlns of the eopula lenite the followin
alllaut, e.g. «o.s cb,tarnc 'whi«.h is contrary,' atn «bo.*m«tili
"which arc silnilar," bç.w «bob,iv ' hieh will ho i/il iii(l.'
99. 'ASAIAZINt; |EI.ATIX E ENI'ENÇES.
((t) Wheu the relative den,»tes rime when, c.g. in tct,
mberes. 'when she bears,' ho;re no-n-dob-mol«»'-sa "hccause
] fraise you' (bdre G. of ittl»" 'hour' was ol'iginally tem-
poral) ; silnilarly after «Cn, cdne 'as le,nu a." a" 'while.'
(b) Whcn the relative dclmtes quantity or manner,
e.g.i. [ méit do-n-indnaffar 'that is the l)rOpol'ti«n in
which it is bestowed,' ind,s. ,o-m-bied-si "the way in whieh
you are' ; similarly after ¢tmal and feib 'like. as,' and in
the case of the 'figura etymologica,' e.g. ni,ldend. . 'o l-
légtsa (tct is cb's««g««l ro-n-d-c»b'n««gts.a t lS llOt et
l'eadillg I have rend but a reprimand (with) which I bave
l'eprilnauded him,' a forcital .for-n-dob-cana»" 'the teaching
by which ye are taught.
(c) Sometimes iustead of lcnition whcn the relative is
thc ohject of thc verb iii the relative clause, e.g. cecb
irnde do-n-gneM 'every prayer that ye make.'
(d) When thc relative represents the predicatc nOUlb e.g.
co-mbi ob«'horp pectho as-m-berar 'so that it is one body
of sin itis callcd,' plebs dei as-n-dan-be»'tbe ni 'we used
to l»e called plcbs Dei.'
(e) After ol, e.g. ol-d«a.r ( * ol-n-taas.
(f) sometilnes to denote reason why: c.g. ix hed
dathav dom (d=nasalized t) 'that is why people are
an'y with me.'
62
(9) explanatory and to mark oratio obliqua: e.g. bad
»wrtad d'tib b.«o, a«-n-db'sid 'let this l)e an encouragement
t() you, that yc will fise,' bés «tsbera-st «te n-ai»m do.,om
auimus 'l,erchance thou wouldst say that «t»ffmt. is its
lltlllê.
(h) the relatic foc'ms of simple ver},s (exccpt the copla)
bave nasalized anlaut usudly in Wh. and regularly later :
e.g. t' ttti m-b 'when he is,' h6re d, qe (d= rit) 'be-
eatlse he goes.'
(i) the «tbsolute forms of thc copula used relatively
nasalize the folh)wing aulaut when it begins a sylla»le
which bears the principal accent : e.g. cdi, b«t.s' m-beo so
long as he is alive.'
100. TrIE GEITIVEOF THERE.ATIX E
The genitive of the relative is expressed :
(,) },y a formally ,on-relative sentence containing a
genitive l,ronoun, i.e. a 1,ossessive pronoun ; e.g. rgte ni
'éid a nbvith, lit 'things hot easy their referring'=
'things whose reference is hot casy'; biit alaili
a pectbe, lit. 'thcre are somc their sins arc found out'=
' whosc sins are found out.'
(b) by a relative sentence introduced by ets, ' which is,' a
relative t,reverb, the negative «t, ad, or relative nasa-
lization: e.g. i»tl ,s bdnirt hires. 'he (his) faith is
weak'=' whose faith is weak; la.-a c,machtgt»ambait
mdm 'to the mighty ones under whose yoke they are:
b#td ad-rd«'at«tr lcs.q "food that they did hot stand in
need = of which they did hot stand in need."
101. THE NEt;ATIVE.
i .q, .icon ; belote the inq,erative and optative d', ha :
before infixed pronouns mwh, ri(wh; in relative sentences
and after interrogative b", »dd, nad ".. s.ech »l---i or [--
o«ws nwh ='ncithcr--nor.' Examples : tri dé»Hm 'I do
hot,' tricotr-choseram 'we destroy hot' (in later O. Ir. it
nasalizes, e.g. tricotr-dét =-»ttgt), trt-déte 'do hot" trtch-
i»t-ro(jb«t (t«dl may pride hot seize us'! t«dt[-ttd-c]re»t«t
'those who buy hot,' in-nad-«t'«dakl .i 'have ye hot
heard?" sech ni-tbart«at coin, n[-comt«a«btmm" ni 'neithel"
bave they given l,or have we asked," ni ind Je.«in eirbtbi
3 na«h dd du-ai«ilbi .nann[ do.gni 'it is l,Ot in llinself
that he trusts, neither d,es he aseribe to himself the things
whieh he does.'
The indelendent l,egative is naicc, nacc='no, l,ot':
in.--.fit nace 'is--or l,Ot': emphatie nacce 'by no
neallS,' adjectival or oomposition fOl'm in nacca dira 'a
non-el,tity' MI. 75 b 20: nade, nate < mtd+hé='no'
in allSVel" to either et positive or ne.,_.'ative que.tiou (the
form natho is aee. to I-'edel'sen horrowcd fron, W.
used in reference to « preterite tense), a later form is are;
tacco, tatou= 'no' as either simple «lel,ial or strong con-
tradictory, cf. (Ierman doch, Freneh st'.
102. "['EM l'ORAL PR EER P..q.
ro, com, ad, od. ess, to-od-, de-ess-, to-com-.
A perfective nleaning for indicative or suhjunctive verbal
forms is cxpressed hy means of certain preverbs of which
fo is the lllOSt usual.
(a) the preterite with perfective preverb bas the
nleaning of a perfect or pluperect; e.g. as.bert 'he
said,' as.ru-bart 'he has said'; argtt,'t d6ib "riant maith
con-ro-itatar a-rly'he taunted them that they had llOt
guarded their king well."
(b) the present indicative with preverb, in a dependcnt
clause, becomes a pertect consuetudinal present, i.e.
denotes what precedes a customary action; e.g. in. m'rail
do-.n-dniat ho ru-mailh for a .ndimtea .remib 'the cry
they make when their enenfies bave been routed by them.'
(c) in a dependell clause he imperfect indicative
with preverb becomes a perfect consuetudinal preterite
when he verb of the main clause is an iterafive past, i.e.
denoes the completion of a repeated action in the pas.
(d) the future with the preverb beeomes a uturum
exactum, i.e. denotes an act.ion tha is imagined as having
taken place at seine future tilne : e.g. mani roima f»" a
«en, ni mema fi, rmm bMb ' if their head be uot dcfeated,
the memhers will net be defeated'; (Thurn. however,
t«tkes ',,ima= romd, suhj.) similarily with 1,res. subj. used
as future, di«t-n-de-r-balam i, nl-bia ne«b 'if we should
die, thcrc will be no one.'
(e) the imperfect subjunctive with prevcrb=future
perfect; e.g. act ar-roi-lgither ind epi.stil .o d'dbsi'as
soon s this epistle slmll have beeu read te you.'
103. re of possibility.
(a) present : ««..beir ' ho says,' ,..ro-bctir ' he tan
say,' [ ru bai ' it eanuot be.'
(b) future: i de-r-genat 'they will net bC al»le te
de it.'
(,.) conditional : d-a.ri-gente ' ye could have donc it.'
(d) pres. subi. : cia ru-bé 'though it could be.'
(e) imp. subi. : fi'inli do.ro-n«ul nach uile 'at a thiug
which auy other could de.'
104. Further uses of re.
(a) in vishes: ro-p cdrae ddib 'may there lc peace
te them.'
(b) in commands: ouly in negative sentences : i
r-ga[tha ' let him lmt defraud'! ni-m de-r-.«aigv ' wake me
llOt.
(c) intention : urna de-r-lind 'lest i shou]d seaudalize.'
(d) necessity: i. écen con-dd-r-ba..t««r 'if is ueeessary
that it should be shmrn.'
(e) permissive: «ffter a«ht 'provided that'ç e.g. uct
rOl 'provided that it be,' a« [ re bat 'provided there
be net.'
105. Position of re.
(a) fixed re: as a rule this re cornes immediately
before the verbal stem after the other prepositions e.g.
as.ru-bart, [.rburt < * e.-ro-bert.
65
(b) movable ro: c»mes immediatel.v after the last
1,retouic prevel.1, : e.. im.ruLd-bed <oeim-ro-di-bed.
ro.im-di-bed, in.r-tttt-hltttar < :iwro-od-lodatar, nad-r-
bd-«ta-ld, tar: it is 1,1aced after the 1,top. fo, when fo is
he second 1,art of a colulOUl¢l, to avoid the contractiou
ro-b>r6 : e.g. bnfo-rlaing: fo or ail infixed 1,ron.+ro
is inserted in the 1,rel,. flot as though for=fo+r; e.g.
fo-rro-r-br,: (rr= nf), Jb-da + ro-r-cem .tbr.cema.
106. Preverl,s which usm'p the functi,ms of fo.
coin: e.g. with pres. sul6. fi'is-com-,rr fromfi'*-oir9;
with 1,reterite a.'-com-ort (a-oir).
ad: with verl,s eOml,Otmded of coin, e.g. conti[
< con-d-til (com-ttil) cocab < con-d-gab (com-gab).
od : con-oi-t-ecb tatar < co-od-t- (con-dieig).
ess : ss-ib-sem (ibM).
de-od: do-o-mmalgg *do-od-m (mleg-), t-o-pacht
< *to-od-bacht (boig-).
de-ess : desid * de-ess-sl (sad-).
to-com : du-cu-t * to-com-ti
107. Veq»s which do no adroit perfective 1,reverbs.
1. verbs COlnpoundcd with fo, e.g. fitir, rocltthtethar
rolaimehar.
2. compouuds h'om the roots 9ne, icc (-on-).
3. the l,rootonic forms of ad.ci, and the 1,erfect ad-
con-dah'ç.
4. ithid, tella, talla, duthrach, at.bath, fo.tair.
VII.--THE VERB.
108. The verb bas two ¥oices--Active and Passive, and an
Active verb may have either au active or deponent flexion.
The latter has arisen front the Id.G. Middle and differs
from the passive flexion i form; in the ilnperfect indi-
cative, preterite suhjunctive, 1,rctcrite future or conditiolml,
the 1st sg. pres. ind. al»s. of denominatives in -ivitldr, iidir,
the 2nd pl. of all teses and luoods, and the 3rd sg. iln-
perative the del,onent forms «tre the same as those of tlle
active.
e
G6
There are three moods: indicative, imperative, and
subjunetive. The iudieative mood has rive tenses : present,
imperfeet, 1,reterite, future, and l,reterite future (also ealled
seeondary fntm'e or eouditional). The subjunetive mood
bas only t.wo tenses, present and preterite ; the imperative
mood has no tenses.
109. TENSE-STEMS.
The tenses and moods of a uormal verb are formed from
rive distinct stems.
(Indicative preseut and imperfect.
1. Present Stem (Imperative.
( Subjonctive present and
2. 5ubjunctive Stem -( l,reterite.
3. Future Stem -(Future and future preterite.
These three stems belong to both active (or deponent)
and passive flexions.
fPreterite Indicative active
4. Active Preterite Stem -( and deponeut.
f Preterite Indicative
5. Passive Preterite Stem passive.
110. STRONG AND WEAK YERBS.
Verbs are divided, in accordance with their mode of
stem-formation, into two classes, Stroug aud Weak. Strong
verbs are primary, weak verbs denominative; the chier
_eristics of the latter being the formation of an
nd_au ffutgre.
The weak verbs are divided into a-verbs alld i-verbs
a_h_e tenninatiou of the 3rd sg. pres.
eot flexion, e.g..càra, "léïcL I1, the case of the
str_ug_rbs-there,-is terminati6n, e.g..beir, .ben.
111. NUIBER AND PER,SON.
The verb has only two numbers sing. and plur. (a dual
subject takes a plural verb, so also may a sing. collective
67
hOUle). IIi the active and deponelt there are three persons
iii each IHllll]el', iii the l,assive there are only forms for 3rd
sing. and 3rd plur.
1 î2. REL.VI'IVE FOR31..
01 In the simple verb iii the absolute flexion separate relative
forms occur in the 3rd sing. and 1,lut. and usually in the
1st ldur.
113. PESONAL ENDIN:S.
The 1,ersonal endings lnay 1,e divided into rive classes :
1. Pres. in(l. and sul.i., future, s-lreterite, thc 1,1ur. of
act. and dcp. and imp. pass., the sing. of thc /-preterite.
2. Imp. siug. act. and dcp.
3. Iml,erf. ind., 1,ret. subi., prct. future.
4. Sux-less ]ret. ind. and 1,lut. of -preterite.
5. Pi'et. iud. pass.
114. AP.S(»LUTE AND C(»NJUN('T FLEXION.
In most tenses and Uloods the personal endings have two
sers of forms called 'absolute' and 'conjunct.'
The conjunct flexion occm's :--
1. Iu all verbs COml,omded with prepositions.
2. III the simple verl) (a) after the verlal partieles 'o and
no, (b) after the following l,articles and conjnllCt,iOlIS, [,
ico, u, ndd, (na«h-) nacon, in, ara", dia'", co", con",
hua ', a particle and relative (s)a '.
Absolute flexion oecurs iii the siml,le verl, with tlle
exception of the cases above lnentioned, e.g. abs. berid,
gaibid, marbaid, léicM ; conj. do.beb', fo-gaib, ul-s-mavba,
arc.léici.
The absolute and conjunct flexiollS correspoud to the
Oldal'y l,er.Ollal-_ endlngs_of [d.G. Some
verbs which always take a preposition I,efore them when no
conjunct or verbal particle is prefixed al,pear only in the
-conjuuct flexion, except iii the imperative where the accent
falls on the first syllahle and the t,repositiol is droppcd,
e.g., 'o.chtinethav, rofitir, 3rd sg. imp. club,ed, finnad.
115. ÇLAS.qIFICATION OF VEI3S.
V,'eak verbs are denoted by A, strong verbs by B.
A I. a-presents : lrêsênt statu
caraid < kar--ti,
A 1I. i-l,resents : present stem = verb stem +-i-; e g.
lé&id < liok"-g-ti, .ldi,'it < liok"iÇ6.
A III. stcms ending in a vowel, e.g..gn& <gnê5.
B I. present stem = vcrb st.cm + thematic vowcl -o-, -e-
(v. 116) with consequent variations of quality in the final
consonant of the stem; e.g. berot (r «) <Sbher-o-nt, but
berid (r ) < bher-e-ti.
B II. prcsent stem=verb stem (with nasal infix)+
t, hematic vowel: e.g. bo-n-g-id 'breaks' («/bog), to-n-g-id
'swears', cf. Lat. pet-n-go, ta-n-go («/pag,
B III. l,resent stem=verb stem +q-suffix; e.g. gaibid
'takes' <hnbh-fe-ti. cf. Lat. «ay-io.
B IV. present stem = verb stem +-nd- (-n-) : e.g. benaid
'strikes' <%hi-n-ti, 'enaid 'buys' <pre-n-ti cf. Gk.
ép,,o. In Proto-Kcltic -n- had become shortened to
-ha- after thc analogy of the plural be-n-me.qi, &c.
B V. as in IV. l»ut originally with i quality of the-n-
which frequently remains; e.g. a'a.chrin 'perishes' ; in
ad.gnin "recoguizes' and 'o.«ltbethar 'hears' the
i-qualit.y of the n is proba]dy the result of infection before
a Ço- sux: thus gn-nÇ> .gnin, cht-n-> .çlub-, cf. Gk.
116. IODE. OF FLEXION.
In Id.G. there wcre two modes of flexion, viz.
thematic and non-thematic. Ve,'bs with thematic
flexion had in the indicative -o- or -e- before the personal
ending, e.g. bher-6, bher-e-.i, bher-e-ti, bher-o-mos,
Sbher-e-te, «bher-o-nti: those with non-thematic flexion
had no thematic vowcl bêfore the l,ersonal ending in the
indicative, e.g. 'es-mi, es-s'i, »e.-ti.
69
117. PERSOXaL EXDIXf;S.
Id.G. had two series of personal endings, riz. primary
and secondary.
Sing. Phu'.
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
1. f-mi -m -me.% -mo.q -me,-mo
2. -.s.i -s -the -te
% -ri -t -tti
In O. If. toE lry_ en(_li_n'sg_Lvere douhless originally
._:.dZ_in the_.bsolute fleOll aad thc secondavy
dings in the coujunet, hut.2wi!g tonalohe l,rimary
are fre,utlv found in the eonjunct flexiou also,
e.g., .reth < ter-e-.% 'thou rmmest" beside .bb" <bher-
e-. 'thou beavest.'
Ending of I st pers. sinff. : -ira.-imm (-ctim,
responds to the non-thematic lwimary ending -mi, the
arising ri'oto the palatal quality of the
slmuld bave remained unlenited is probably due to the
influence of the 1st sing. of the eopula
(Thurn.) : the thematic ending -6 aplars as -o, -u, e.g.
arco, thtge < p2"k-6, %te&h-5; it appears as -u regularly
in the 1st sg. conjunct of monosyllabic stems in
glu, otherwise it apl,eavs merely as ,¢-qu:dity of the fiual
consouant of the stem iu conj. 1st sg.. e.g..bim"
<%her-6, .cm <%mn <%m-a. The ending -bn
gradnally ousts the -6- ending mtil in the Mo(lena
]auguage it is miversal.
Ending of 2nd pers. sinff. : the -i is vedueed from the
thematic primary ending -e-, + si whenee it. soread analogi-
eally to the other verbs: thus beri <%er <%herei
<%her-e-s£ In the conjmmt form the secondavy endiug
disappears, e.g..bh" < bhe»'-e-..
Ending of 3rd pers. sinff. : -M, -ith (-cM, -«dth) repre-
sents the thematic pvimary emliug -e-, -g, -a-, +-ri : e.g.
be»'id < bher-e-ti, lg'M < :*liok"->ti, cm'aM < ka'--ti :
the seeondavy euding is represented b the eonjunct forms
cm'a, .léici, .bei," <k,'-&t, lik"'--t, %ber-e-t.
. l. " 70
Euding of Ist pers. plut. : l,solute -mi represents
G. -me.i > mei > mL t.he m unlenied tbrough ana}ogy
of he 1st l,ers. 1,I. of eolmla ammi <%.s-me.i: the eon-
.imm ending-m (m «) rel,vesets -mo., e.g. beram <bher-
o-mo.s.: this-m was originally lenited but gradua]ly loses
its lenit[on through the influence of he absolute
Ending of 2nd pers. plut. : absolute -the is either
dual ending -thes or a new formation analogous to ls
pl. -mi. -me ; eokiune -hl cornes from the thematie owel
+ Id.G. secondary ending -te thus .berM < (e)-bher-e-te.
Ending of 3rd pers. plut. : absolute -it, -ait rel,resents
thematie vowel + prhnary endiug -#i, e.g. eara[t <A'ar-
6-nti, Iéi«it <lioh"--nti : conjnnct-et, -at, (older-ot)=
thematic vowel + secondarv endinu" -nt, e.g. léçet
Lut, berat < %erot
The relative forms for 3rd sing. and pl,.»d ls.t pl. are
pr)ably.ve:b«d forms + suxed lWOnOUnS.
N.B.For « diflçrent exl,lanaio of the l,erson«d endings
v. Pedevsen V. G. M1344.
118. Paradigm of Present Indicative.
Active.
Examples : ca»'aim 'I love', léicim 'I leae' biv«, '[
bel'.'
ahsolute flexion.
71
conjunet flexion
ahsolute
Sg. 1 birt
2 beir, (berf)
3 berid,-ith
rel. bere.s.
Pl. 1 bermai
tel. bermcte
2 berthe
3 berait
tel. bcrd««c,
be'am .t«d-brem
berM, -ith .t,i-brM, -ith
bercer .t«d-bret
The distinction hetwecll absolutc and con.[tnlct flexion is
hot illVtlGIy ol,servcd: thu.% i,, weak verhs, 1st and 2nd
sg. abs. l'e used also for eon.i. ; fm'ther in strolR' verbs al)s.
fol'ms like f»r.eonim, .rethi are round used as eojunet
beside remflar fovms like flw-«m, .bir. The relative
ending of the 1st 1,I. -me is fom,d rcgularly only in Wh.. iii
Ml. the ordinary ending -»i be'ins to tel,lace it. The
unsyncopated form of the rel. 3vd ld. in -ire is due to the
influence of the non-relative form in -ft, e.g. techta[te
beside techte <*te«ht-de.
119. |)EPONENT PERSONAL ENDINGS.
,St pers. sing. : -ur, -or hoth <*Or (1-,ut v. § 108),
explanation n,eevtain, er. Lat. ,cqu-or.
2nd pers. sing. : -tirer, -der, prohalfly -the + r.
3rd pers. sing. : al-,solutê -thir, -dit, eonjmet -th(cr,
-da»'; the vowel belote this ending i. nevêr drolq,ed,
eonsequently the original ending was -tf -. -tf"-, er. Lat.
seqm-tl«r.
72
Ist pers. plur. : al»s. -mit, eonj. -mat, -mer (arch:dc
-mot), with mfienited m cf. Lat..equi-mur.
2nd pers. plur, : as in L. a special deponent e]lding
is lacking; the ending of the 2ud pers. plut. act. is used
instead.
3rd pers, plut, : abs. -tir, cou.i. -tar <«-ntri, -ntr , cf.
Lat.
120.
Examldes : labrm"
AI.
3 1.britbir
Pl. l labrimmir
2 lrtbrithe
3 labritir
Deponent,
' I .l,eak,' cuiriur 'I place.'
AII.
121,
PA.SIVE IERONAL ENDIN«;..
In the passive there are special forms ouly for 3rd pers.
sing. or plut'. : Sg. al)s. -if, -tbb', conj. -er, -thar, -tber ;
Pl. ahs. -tir, conj. -far, -ter. -if, «tf arises from -F; -thb-
from -ti-r ; -tu, -tar from mti-; -nto-r ; cf. Lat. agi-lut,
agu-ntnr.
122. Passive.
ahsolute.
AI. AII.
act. des.
S.% 3 carthair h:icthir cuirthir
PI. 3 rartair léi«ter cuirtir
eonjullCt.
Sg. 3 .cartbar .l&ther .cuirther
Pl. 3 .eartar .léi«etar (ldb'ter) ",'m'rtcr
al,solute eonjuuet
Sg. 3 berair .berar (.berr)
Pl. 3 bertnw .bertqr.
The reniainin. persons of the passive are c×pressed by
hlfixed pFOllOllliS with the 3rd sg. ; e.g., no-m-chal'thar.
'I t%lll loved,' io-t-berai', 'thon art borne,' no«l-hSictkel ",
' we are left..'
The relative forms of l;|!en._Aui.d_l,assive are
fl, o_f_ ---ïl,oA.tt_ill tjte_l..aIl]_2nd sg., and
2nd pl. dponnt, whioh tak iii addition tlw prevei.l no-.
123. Imperfect Indicative.
No satisfactory e'plail:tlOll of the pcrsonal endings
is fortheonlin: oli|y eolljmlel0 fornis u'e found, siilce the
imperfeel0 always takes the preverb no hefln'e
124. IMPEATIVE
Personal endings.
2nd pers. sing, : the 2nd sg'. imper, aet. cornes from
form eonsisting of t.he verl stem + a vowel, and had originally
no personal ending: e.g., car
beD', <bher-e, er. Lat. oto-a, and-i, ag-e: the-thG -te
of deponents is an old Middle ending -thês.
3rd pers, sing. : ending'=-to : e.g., bered <bhere-to,
carad < kar-to, lé«ed < *lit»k"- to. T. of
the plur. are the saine as in the çio L of the
T_dtinetiombetweeu al)solutc aud co
the principal accent ahrays falls ou the first s'llab]c e
w_en.t.he form coq,tains an iufixed proouu.
I)eponents have active flexiou in the 1st pers. phw., but
in later MS,. dep. flexiou. The verh t[afft ' I go ' bas a
form for the 1st pers. siug., riz., t[ag, t[ach 'let me go."
Some verbs retaiu a vocalic euding lu thc 2nd pers. sing. :
e.g., déne 'do' ff'oto do.gn/n, dé[cçe 'see' from do.cht
(ac.ch«) and lu del). thc act. form cuire bcsi(te
125. Active.
Al. A I[ B I. & II.
Sg'. 2 car Idi«" beir
3 ('arad,-atl léh'ed,-et] berad,-ed
Pl. 1 tarare léicem beram
2 caraht.-aith léi«id,-ith berid,-itl,
3 (',rat ldi«et berat
Deponent.
Examp]es : .c«»nalnadar "fu|fils': «,drithir 'places';
ro-cl,dnethar ' hears.'
AI. AI1. BV.
Sg. 2 co»<dnaithe,-dc <.irtle chtinte
3 co»nalnad,-ath ,',dred chdne<l
PI. 1 (con,aln,tm,-amar) (cuitera) (cSdnem, -emmar)
2 comalnaid,-aith c,drid chtinid,-ith
3 comalnatar cni»vtar chdnetar
Passive.
AI. AIL BI.
Sg. carthar «,drther berar ('berr)
Pl. cartar ('uirler bertar
Verhs B III. iuflect iu the M,s. like A II. but lu the
conj. 31"(1 sg. l)res, act. the forms bave no fiual vowel;
contrast .gaib with .léi«i.
126. THE UBJUNCTIVE STEM.
The subjuuctive stem bas two forms,
a»subjunctive and ssubjunctive.
riz. the
75
rot, us .Ç«ar-«ar: accordingly the sulL stem and
pres. stem are idenfical in verbs A I ; the thematie
vowels -o-, -e- (B I.) md mî- B IV) are dropped: the
-i- of A Il. is also los but causes the fimd eonsommt of the
roo o retain an i- ,luality, henee the sulçi, endiugs beeome
-ea,-e-instead of -a, -a-: in B III. the final eonsommt of
he foot, h»se its palatal quality, e.g. lwes. stem
aib- - suivi, gab-.
-subjunctive is eOllned to strollg verl»s whose
foot or ver]) eom ends in dental or guttural stogs and
fo the foot, eonsequently the uasal infix of ]I II. is dr6pped
eompensatovy l«ngtheninv takes phtee, e.g. b,g-,
127.
a-Subjunctive Present.
Active.
AI. Ail.
al,s. COlli. ahs. eonj.
crtra .«'«tr Iéirea "lgic
«arae «'crac Idive .Idi«e
«araid -ith .rata Idieid, -ith .Idiçea
caras Iéices
Iéi«mi
Iéb'me
Idicthe
léieit
léi«de, -te
.Idh'em
ldieid, -ith
léicet
Like ca»', are infleeted a-subis, helolging to B [. ;t.q bera,
cela, &c. The dcponents iHflect al»s. and con.i, cxactly as in
prcs. indic, cxcept that 1st pers. sine', al,s. and conj. ends in
-er,-af, intead of -ur, -or: -er after palatal consonant,
-af after rien-palatal.
The passive forms are the saine as in pres. indicative
passive exeep tha strong verbs bave in the sing. the
endings -thir, -thar as contrasted with the indic.
76
128. a=Subjunctive Preterite.
Examl,les of strong verh B I.
sing', l,lur.
1 .be'c¢in .be'mai
2 .berlba .berthae
3 .be'ad, -aih .bertai.¢.
hl strong verbs the final consonan of the foot retEius
the non-palatal quality due to the -a-, in other verbs he
flexion is exactly that of the imperfec indicative. Deponents
inflec like active verbs.
Da¢Si ve.
AI. AII.
Sg..rartbae .bertb,te .léictbe
PI..«,trtais .be rt a i. .l é iet i.
129.
Deponent.
Al,s. Conj. Al»s. Conj.
S. 1. (fe..ar) .fe.'mtr (fe.«Mmir) .fe.samar
2. (./è..«cr) :lè.s'er (feste) .fes.id
3. (fc.«tir) .fe.«tar ( fe.çadir) .fes.atar
Passi ve.
Sg. tk«stair ge.s'at r (.festir)
Collj. .t[a.tar .ge.«,ar .fe.ntar
Pl. (téMtir) (ges..itir) fes..,.itir
Conj. (.t[a«rttar) "ge.s'rttrtr :lë.srttar
77
The 1st sing. al»s. is hot fimn(1, but iL prol»«dly endcd
-a;tl«m has i)een iuflueneed by the indic. I,res.
Only Lwo examples of Lhe bs. flexi«m of (lel,oneuts are
fom(l, riz., 3rd sg. eMi," '(thou'h he) eat,' tel. me.tar
'(who may) judgc.'
Stems with £llaut, or Val'iatiou off vowcl, restore the
origiual vowcl belote the addition o[ thc -s- ; thus guidim,
stem gtdd <ag"hod'. is amant ri'oin ged<g"hed-, and
ged + - becomes gess-.
For hegimmrs diflicult forms are those of thc 3vd sg.
conj., c.g., ffd, .td[, .16, but the Ioss o[ fin«d cons(mants is
strict accoi'dance with phonctic law (v. 2 l aud cf. N. of cou-
sommt«d stems, 57) ; thus, : ged + s + t > g«ç a s'teigh + s
+ t >téi, alog +s>/6; in the othcr persons the -s was hot
filttl, e.g., 2nd sing. gei.us<aged+. +.L Still more diffieult
are the enclitic fol'ms of the 3r(l sing. where the stem is
reduced to mercly the consonant or eousouants of the
anlaut: c.g., t-in-fet<to-h-.4ç«ed 'inspires,' enclitic 3rd
sing. pres. sul..t-inLb (unless he) 'inspire' (for b=.f<
g't- v. 41 b (e): scochtl, sulj, stem (sees.,), enelitie
eon.v5s; deuteroton, fo-16, prototon..fut The stem
ag- is reduced to -a in .cuinten <%on-alLia and .tdi to
in eon.éit. Final -r. becomes -rr and does hot disappear,
e.g., orgid, 3rd Sillg. SU])j. *or' enclitie .coin-af stems with
initial f=e in enclitie positions after a vowel disappear
altogcther, e.g., do.col <de-co-«ess-t, du.dt <ato-dL
fed-s-t.
130. s-Subjunctive Preterite.
Sing. ]|llr.
1..ge..inn .téisinn .gesmi. .tiasmais
2..gesta .ti««.ta .geste
3..ge.sed .téised .ge.tis .tht.tctis
Passive,
tht.t«e Pl..ges.tis
Sg. .geste .t[«.tai,
Under the influence of the a-sul)junctivc thc pcrsolml
endin tend more and more towards a-quality : e.g. sg.
78
1st .«d.abo (..ebm), 3rd .b6.ad (botgM), pl. -mai% -tae,
-tai. : the forms iu -tae beeome later-ta. Deponeuts inflee$
like actives, e.g..fe.b,, .fe.ta, &e.
N.B.As no (or u[, di«d', ara", ,ç'c.) is ah'ays prefixed
to the subi. pret., ouly eon.i, forms are found.
TI FUTURE STE31.
181. There are three types of future, riz., (a) the 4-
Iuture, (b) the asigmatic tuture, and (c)the-s-
iuture. Weak verbs fovm the -f- future, strong verbs the
asignmtie or the-.q- future aeeording as they make their
subjmetives iu -a- or -.q- : by way of exeepfiou some strong
words adol,t thc -f- future, while a few weak verbs follow
the asigma.tie future; e.g'..le, fut...icfea; cavaid, fut.,
.cechra, seavaM, fut..cdra.
The f= Future.
132. The f- future is formed by addiug the suffix -fa, -fea
to the future stem: in the eoujunet. 1st sg. aet.. it is
written -b (i.e. ff), and bas u-quality, e.g. lé[ç;tb; it. is
sometimes also written -b in inlaut, espeeially after -s-
The J 1,eeones palatal after a l,alatal vowel ; e.g. léiçfea
<-l[»k*t4-fit, but. verbs A ]. change the qualit.y of the
stem final to palatal belote this sux; e.g. anaid 're-
mains,' fut. ahCed. The following exl,lanations of the
origin of the suffix, none of whieh are quite satisfaetory,
bave been offered :
(1) That it is 1,art of t.he verb 'to be'like-bo in Lat.
ama-bot, aud er. use of a.,mi 'I ara'in gkr. 1st fut.
ddl.,i. If this t.heory were true, we should
expeet to find b written more frequently than but
the reverse is the faet.
(2) That it first arose from the redul,lieat.ed fut. of a
verl, whose subi. stem was %t8, whenee redupl.
fut. = .«,4t«- < %'fa, but sueh a verb does hot oeeur
(Thurn).
¢Aecording to Thurn. this is a new fornmtion frona -bain on the
analogy ero : e','am : : a»mbo : amabam.
79
(3) Th«t it corresponds to the Old Welsh fut. in -lmu
(from sa-), the suttix -.4a after a stem ending in
spirant b (/3) would give cicr < v + h (Thurn).
The probabilities are tlmt it is some form of the -s. fut.
01Examl,les of the deponent forms in the sing. abs. are
rare. In the 1st sg. dep. unsyneopated forms are round,
e.g..cui'far beside .molfitr.
Passive.
Active and del,onent bave the saine inflection.
ai)s.
Sg. léi«fidir,-ithb"
rel. léh'fider
Pl. léicfitb"
l'et. léicfiter, -fetar
134. Future
sing.
2 .ldiqth n
2 .léicfeda
3 .ldic]ed, -feth
conj.
.léi«fider
léicfiter, -fet(tr
Preterite.
plut.
léicfim m is
léicfide, -filhe
.léi«fitis.
Passive.
Sing..ldi«fide, -fithe. Plur..léicfitis.
The deponents inflect like actives. Only conj.
occur (v. § 123).
forms
135. THE ASlf;31ATIç' FUTURE.
This future is formcd 1)" redul,licating thc a- suljuuctive
stem I s fro'Cher sul,-dividcd ïuto three types (1)the
ordmary reduplicated future, (2) the e-future, (3)
the future af verbs B IV. (v. ilS).
1. The ordinary reduplicated future. The vowel
of the redul,licrtel syllahle is either i or e, the latter
usually belote a on-palatal consonant; e.g. with i,
'is born,' sul, stem gena-, fut. stem gigote- <g:gea- ;
daimid 'admits,' suli, stcm dama-, fut. 3'd sg..didma
di-dama; ibid drmks, subi. stcm eba-, fut. stem
¢ba <i-cba ( long through contrrction o vowels):
with e, «amt«l 'sings,' subi. stem cam-, fut. stem ce«hta-
<ce-chana-; do.rolgtt (1,erf.) 'has chosen,' fut. 3rd s
do.gega.
2. Th¢ e- utue( Almost all tloe forms uud bï this
future are the res(fit of widcspread aualogy ff'oto a few
genuine rcduplicatcd futures with a weu form of the foot
like the Skr. desideratives : e.g. céla < cec]la
kl being the weak form of the foot kel. Examples are
; ' ' takes, .géba ;
berkl, .bdra celid conceals, .cdla : gaibid ' '
do.gn[ ' does,'
3. The uture of Çlass B IV. e.g. 'enaid sclls, fu.
3rd sg. -rb'i ; le,raid 'adheres,' fut. 3rd sg..lili; benaid
forms a future without redul»licatio, probably from the
influence of .fe».
ion of th e al)ove future.l, 2, and 3 isl)a of the
3tt.
136. The s- uture. "hof the s- futurç_is
forncd...from t!m s- stlby reduplicatiou, the stem vowel
being shorteno!" los.t. The vowel of (le uplication
hs normally i, but hefore stems with a it usually
hecomes e: e.g. gnidid ' " ' _
pras, subj. ffe..% fut. gi9...;
bongid breaks, suivi, b6..-, fut. stem bib..s- ; but maidid
'breaks,' subi. mds, fut. stem mem...s'-.
81
Note speciaily the followinff phonetic peculiari-
ries :--
(a) ch alld ¢1 are retaiJed 1,cfore l, e.g. ad.claid
hunt, fut. 1st siug. od-«i«hlw; dlongid cleaves, fut.
stem did..l.-.
(b) Vcrhs with an iuitial vowel only take the i of thc
reduplieation, e.g. o'ffid 'strikes,' subi. o»-v-; fut.
ithid 'eats,' subi. es.s.-from xed, fut. [ss-hy contraction
(cf. lb-).
(c) oots with initial .l drop the lenied altogether
after the reduplieatiou, e.g. .laidid 'strike.%' fut. sel...s.-
< %e-.<l..s'- ; .ç'l;jid, fut..il...s.< %i-M...s'.
(d) Vcrh. with initi«d s=., d have f<.<"d after the re-
,luplicatio, e.g..ennid ( x / .s.denn-) , sul:j...ê....-, fut. Mf..-.
(e) satid, sul,j..s.dm-, makes fut. st'a«s- < .i-.g.a...s'.
(f) Roots with initial f < t3 drop i after reduplieation;
e.g. subj. jè..s, fut. fia..s. < tdi-t2e.s..: as this la beeomes e
whcn the stem does llOt fovm the final syllable, a coftlsion
of the subi. aud fut. fovms results, e.g. vo./itiv 'kuows,"
fut..fict.ç'ta»" also us sul,j., while .festar (subi.) occurs as fut. :
»nMith if 'judges ' form its fut. stem in .ndcts.- ff'oto analogy.
(ff) The consonaut of thc reduplicatiou syllahle is lost
aftcr fo- aud to- wllen they bear the ],riucil,al accent, e.g.
jbL.iti.s. (MS. Wh. 15 a 20) < j'oil.it < fo-l:lo.s'it', from
.f»/obff; fo[chfio'v but deutcrotouic fo.cichuvr from
,lb'ce5"d.
FOR31. WITHOUT REDUPLICATION.
137. When the stem is unaccented throughout all its
forms, us is the case when two preps, precede it, i is noL
reduplicated and does hot differ from the subjuucive, e.g.
niM 'washes,' fut. -ninu.', but do.fo-nu..; orcdid, fut.
io»'»', but do.es.«.-av»" ; tit ' I go,' fut. 3rd pl..hotsat
< in-od-te.sat.
2. Some verbs use he .-suhj. without reduplication as
future, evett wheu the stem is accented : e.g. vethid, fut.
3rd sg. -re'; hd,did, .lce (i.e., lé); ahlid, 3rd sg. abs.
._'i._q.q.
2
18. Paradigm of the reduplicated s= future.
Sg. 1
2
3
rel.
Pl. 1
tel.
0
3
rel.
189.
Sg. 1
2
3
Pl. 1
2
3
ahs. conj. del,.
(gigsea), gig.e .gigius
(gig.s.i) .gigi.
ff iy i.s "e i9 .f (a.t a r
vives
(gi.immi) .9i«c,n fe.«amar
(giv.s.imme)
9EE ie.«'te "9 i9.'M .fe.,.s.id
9 i9.'it "9 ig.et .jèssa t a r
i9..ite.
Future Preterite.
'di9.'in n .im'r
('9EEive.ta) .iirr,
ffigsed .iar»; .ior
(.9EEig.intmi.')
('ti9EEe.,'te)
gigsilis .errat, .htrat .ci«hret.
.ci«him'r
(.ci«hirr)
.ci«herr
I the conj. 3rd sg. the vowel of the stem is sometimes
retaiued, sometimes lost as in the s- subi. e.g. "maidid,
mema ; mscM, mena ; but slaidid, .,.el ; .anich, .aih ;
ligM, .sil
PFETERITE STEM (tCt. and dep.).
140. The preterite stem appears only in the pret. indic.
act. aud dep. It is formed in three ways :
1. the s:preterite : all wcak verbs and a few strong
verbs.
2. the t=preterite : strong verbs in -1 aud --r and
several iii -m and -g, active flexiou ouly.
3. the suffix-less preterite : further sub-divided into
reduplicated aud unreduplicated : all other strong verbs.
141. The s: Preterite.
T adding.-.s- (ori#uall,y
-6'8-) to the verb stem ;the folan correspon[oE to".t è Id.(.
142.
Paradigm of the s- Preterite.
ca rsa m .léi«sem
only.
144.
Sg. 1
3
Pl. 1
Paradigm of the t- Preterite.
COllj.
accented
.bim't
.birt
.bert
(.bertammar)
2 (.bertM)
3 .bertar, .bertatar
Of the abs. flexion are round only 3rd sg. birt, rel.
bert,e, pl. tel. berhtr, bertatm'; the 1st and 2nd sg. were
prohably bb't«, berti.
Further examples: alhl 'rears,' ait; at.r, ig 'arises,'
atracht ; celid ' hides,' celt ; .em-, -dt ; .sera, -.ét ; orgid
' slays,' ort < orcht.
145. The suffix-less Preterite.
A. reduplicated.
The vowel of the reduplication syllable is e ;_ the ini
consonant of thê roo' 'llai,lê-'wli-h (;ll6ws Ïïks always
non-p;dMM quality, evel when the verl) stem has a palatal
vowel. The consonantal groups chl, fil, fit often remain
after the redupl, syllable, but sl, .n- We sel-, sert- as in the
s-future.
146. Paradigm of reduplicated Preterite.
Examl,le : canaid ' s'ngs.'
conj.
Sg. 1 .cechan Pl..cechnammar
2 .cechan. .ce('hnaid
3 .cecha bi .cech natar.
Absolute forms are rare. Further examples are :--
claidid ' digs,' cechlad- ; maidid ' breaks,' memad- ; ad.
greinn ' follows,' .gegrann- ; fo.glebn ' learns,' "geglann- ;
'ennid ( Ç swnn-) ' plays,' sephann- or sefann- ( = *'e-
«ann) : hgul hcks, lelag- ; igtd stnkes dowu, selag-
(: smgtd drops, senag-= se-sr
from the dep. gam«th" s born, ge-gn- has become gen.
In later O. If. there is a tcndency to suhstitute the vowel
of the present for thc e of the reduplication syllable, e.g.
ca('h¢tin for .cechain («anaut), bobig for bebig (bongid
'breaks'). In prototonic forms with perfective vo the
collsonttnt of the reduplication is lost and fo +e give r6e-,
roi-, e.g. ro.cechan, prototon, ro[«h««n; ro.gegrann, pro-
toton. .ro[grann. After this aualogy the prep. coin
chauges to colin-, c6em-, e.g. do.nig 'washes,' 3rd pl. do-
c6emnachtar (=*nag-tar) ; fo.loing ' endures,' fo.colin-
I«,'htar (--lag-tar). I MI. couçsio begns to arise
betweeu the l'o- of the deuterotone
ro'- of thefo :hir.k ha:a .[0îZ.d.upl.
., e.g..tt)r'rïcdn-fo'-f'.ro[«hain and t'ice versd
r,[«lwdnatar fi»r ro.cechtatar.
147. lrregular reduplication.
Conçds o "ic bave . !weterçç stem ac-(c=g)
i.e. tin-ce, cf. Skr. an-arc- from arc-, e.g. t-ic cornes, pre.
l-dwaic.
lb,id 'le»s' mkes leblanff-, with fo-, roiblag ; ling
<:¢pling- redupl. Sple-plan hence, with loss of initial p,
lebla»g: amdogieally drinid ' climl,s' m«des drebrag.
iutçed to the initial eon-
souant. tr the çlul,lieation, e.z. le-cï'd -sg. lil ;
, .rit creçt-aid g. -edr< cechr-. 3';
gtin reeogmzes 1st. and 2nd sg., .gdn <Sgegn-; cikl
' weeps,' «h. The ç]cp..:o.club.fhqr ,' heArs' OE u as
1. Unreduplicated forms.
The unreduplieated forms are divided into -preterites
aud i-preterites.
-preterite: some verl»s have d in the preterite stem
vhen aeeented instead of t.he ê or â of their foot syllables,
e.g. rethid 'ruus,' rdth- (encl..ro-rth-atar, .ro-rth-etar
< %'o-reth-atar: techid flees, tdch- (encl. ad.rde-thach).
i-preterite : /per, subi..era ' graut,' pret. 3rd sg. W ;
mMithir 'judges,' 1st sg. m[dar (euel..ammadm').
149. lrregular unreduplicated forms.
The verb ' to go' forms itsA»ret_erit.e oe. 1 and :!od,
,,mrike' nl soE.-bi, pl..b«otar,
enêI..rwba,
86
150. Paradigm of unreduplicated Preterite.
Examples : ,.l«idid ' prays and midithb" judges :
A relative form dde is fouud iii 3rd sing. :in lat.er
MSS. he 3rd s. conj. is used for absolute, c.g., [dh'h
' flcd' (te,'hhl). In eoutradistinction to the deponen ending
he 3rd ldural -atar of the active may he shortcned to -tav.
151. ['.ksstv PRE'rEUlTESTEM.
The passive prçt.s£m .cQrds $o
v ïiï -tgia-, cf. td« and Lat. ve adj.
scvip-tt-s.
The t of the sux hecomes th or d (6) after vowels, e.g.
cava-d, h@e-d, "9ngth, :t)'d-th : c and ff hecome ch before t,
e.g. bo»ffid ( / bol), .bo«ht ; Mi9id, .Me«ht
dental or s + t =s., e.g., mid-ithir, mes.. : claidM,
ad.cl (/qL«i,.), .ce.«. : also stems in -n», e.g., .lcm, .çla ;
o'id makes .ort <orch as fit the t-l,reterite.
Ntrong verbs with roots containiug -er, -el change to 'e,
le, e.g. ber;d, .b»rth ; «elid, .cleth ; ¢b.ceb'd, .cre.s.
Stl'oug verbs in -n aud -m make preterites in -dt (t = d),
e.g. c«t»,a,! 'sings,' «ét ; &dmM, dét ; do.moinethm.,
go,aid ' wouuds ' lnakes .goit, .gdet (from a diflrent foot).
12. Paradigm of Passive Preterite.
Ahsolute.
AI. Ail. BV.
Sg. ,3 cartkae ldicthe brethae
Pl. not found no15 fouud nog round
Conjunet.
Sg. 3 .carad .léi«ed,-eth .breth
Pl. .ca'tha "léi«thca "bretha
7
153. THE PARTICii'LES.
The Past Participle Passive: This is formed from
active verbs like thc passi'e l»l'eteritc, but with the suttix
-tio-, ti«?-, e.g. cnrthae, ldicthe, dep. m,lt(te
Stl'Olg vel'bs have the saine root as in the pi'et, pass., e.g.
benid, blthe ; o'gid, ortie; ('l«tidid, cl«tisse;
«dte : irregular arc gtiid, gnethe (contrast s»tiM, ,dthe) :
Jbr.fen, ]ov.b¢tMe (unsylmopatcd), but also dr-bthc (used
as adj.). This participle sometimes bas {he force of
'possihility,' e.g. ven(dd 'sclls,' r[tbe 'saleable': ncph-
icthe 'iucurable.' The declensio is that of ;uijs.
-e, -ae, 69.
The Participle of necessity : The suffix is -.ri -hi:
abl Thurncysen (after Zupitza) suit in orihese
liciples are old pl'edicative datives of verbal a])sCracts
with the sux -tei-, -tF, and compares Skr. p-tdyê'for
(h'ilkig' = ' to be (h'un,' e.g. cartbai, ldicthi;
'sings' nmkes céti, but in compoun(1 fin'.«ai» both job'-
«thi and jo'.c«tti; .em (do.em) makcs .iii (dlti). Verbs
with stems ending in a dental or s make -.. sometimes
-sti, e.g. g,tMM, 9essi, mMithb', me.¢s.i ; as.eleim, ,
eclst«i: benM and s'e'ncdd make bethi, srethi ; the
partieilde of berid is only found in syneop;ted eom-
pouuds as t«-b«trlhi, eperthi, thc abs. form was lu'ol)ably
:brethL
154. VERBAL NOUNS.
Ill O. IlliCo'III L l!O i.l,itive, bu
th uF-ffgê'o-'T a :el'ba ln iii the dit. wi:l
es _pl)ache--th, ê } of"tlléi
1. As a rule the verbal nouii has the saine l'oot as the
'erb, but SOnle few verbs use a different foot as verbal
nOUll, e.g. ,j«d y.n. of fichid 'fights," dl-çal of do-fich,
&c. ; deuominative verbs luay havc the nOUll from which
they are del'ived as verbal noire, e.g. lcc y.n. of [cc«tid
88
heals'; the usuM ending for denoninative verbM nouns
is A I. -ad, -al]. A II. -iud, -iut], -ud, -uth, deelined as u-
tem, e.g. mdraid 'magnifies,' ndrad ; léicid, l{ici«d ; also
an«dd (primary verh), ana&
2. Conpounds whose roots end in a guttural or -nn have
no termination and deeline as neuf. o-stems, e.g. fo.loing,
fulach ; ad.slig, aslach ; do.sebn, D. sg. tofunn.
3. Neuters in -e (o-stems), e.g. saidid, suMe; laigM,
lige ; fi'i..gai', ff'erre ; ad.ffnin, aitlge.
4. Feminincs in -e (]d-stems), e.g. ff«idid, guide ;
.slige : claMM, ch«Me.
5. SuIx -tS, f. : e.g. bretl, G. brithe ; cleilh (celid),
mlith (melht).
Sux -to-, n. : e.g. nrath (mairnid), .mat (.mobethar).
Sux -tu-, m. : e.g..mess <*med-tt (mMithër), fi.s.s
SuNx -tiS-, f. : e.g. d[tin (d[-e»t-), Joditit (fo.daim),
toim-tiu < *to-men-tit (do.mobteth«tr).
6. SuNx m. -mu-, f. -md-, n. -smn- or -»n- : e.g. gnim, m.
(gniid), cretem, f. (cvetid), cétmm, n. (cingid).
7. Sux -nL, -nd-, f. : e.g. buain<*bog-ni (bongid),
<*ag-ni (*a9id); orcun, G. oi».cne (o'ffid), fedan, G.
fednae (fedid).
8. Nouns in -l: e.g. ,'(tal (canaid) anacul (.anich),
gab61 (9aibid).
N.B.'enaM aud «'enaid make * ricc * cricc (D. A. sg.
reicc (ricc), c-reicc) ; len«tid, 91enaM, tlenaid make lena-
mon, ffloamon, tlenamon. The loan-words scr[baid and
l(9aid make scrlbed and lgged fron Lat. gerund, and
do.leg(t 'dcstroys' nake d[lgend after the analogy of Lat.
delendmn.
Complete Paradigm of the Weak Verbs.
Exmnples : ca-raid ' loves,' léicid ' leaves,' .uidiidiv
(dep.) ' places.'
$9
Active :
AI.
i55.
Sg. 1 «arabn
"2 «arai
3 «araid
l'e]. ('a»'o8
Pl. 1
tel. «armae
2 «arthae
3 «arait
tel. «araite
g. 1 .«art
'2 -ca rai
Pl. 1 -tarare
2 .raraid
3 .cara
INDICATIVE.
A Il.
Present absolue.
ldi«im
léb'i
léb'M
léice.s'
léi«mi
léi«»e
léi«tbe
léb'it
Iéb'de, -ite
£'onjunet.
l(i«iu, -ira
.l(i«i
.léi«i
.léi,'em
.léirM
.léi,'et
Deponent.
.mtMigther
..ahligcdar
..ttMigmer
"mddigid
..¢,idigetar
3
rel
rel.
t57.
Sg. 1 .cqraimt
2 .¢'(t'tha
3 .«arad
Pl. 1 .car»mis
2 .«arthae
3 .carrais
158.
ca»Jè
cafid
cafimmi
«arthe
c a rfi t
cmfite
lmper|ect (alw«tys conjunct).
.suhligimt
..uidigthea
.su.hliged
.suidigmis
..ddigthe
.suidigti.ç
9O
159
Sg. 1 .carub
2 .carè
3 .carf.
PI. 1 -ca:tbm
2 .«mfid
eonjunct.
.ldi«iub
.léh:fe
.léic.tèa
.léicfem
.lébfid
.léiqtët
su Migj'er
.suM igfider
.snMigfedar
su Migfem m af
.suid igfid
.mtMigfetar
Future Preterite (ahrays conjtmet).
.h;icfeda
.ldh'fed
Idiçfim mis
.h;i::tide
.h:iqfiti.s.
s ui, ligfeda
..uMigfed
.suid i,.zf m »n;
.s«Mifide
.su id ifi tis
161.
Sg. 3 carais
Pl. 3 carsait
162.
Sg. 1 .çarus
2 .carais
3 .car
Pl. 1 .carsam.
2 .carsaid
3 .car.at
Preterite (ahsolute).
léici.
léic.it
eon.iunct.
.léicis
.léic
.léi«sem
.léicMd
.léic.et
163.
Sg. 1 cara
2 ca 'ae
3 caraid
rel. carat
Pl. 1 carmai
rel. c¢o'l(te
2 carthae
3 cetrait
rel. caraite
5UBJUNCTIVE.
Present (ahsolute).
léi'e¢t
léice
lé/cM
léi(es
léi«mi
léi«me
léicthe
leicit
léi«de, -ire
91
i64. conjunct.
Sg. 1 -cor .ldi«
2 .('«« rae .léi«e
3 .ce, fa .léicec,
PI. 1 .carcnn .léicem
2 .car(cM .ldi('M
3 .ca fa t .léice t
..tddiger
..uMigther
..tddigedm"
.suid i,,fid
.sm'digetar
.stddiginn
..nidithea
.stthliged
..uidigmis
..uMi.lthe
..tddb.ltis
Passive : INDICATIVE.
167 Present, absolute.
Sg. 3 cartbair léicthir
tel. carthar léicthcr
Pl. 3 cartair,-ata5" ldictir,-itir
rel. cartm',-atar lé[cter,-et(te
conjunct.
Sg. 3 .carthar .léicther
Pl. 3 .carte;-atar .léicter,-eter
suMi9EEthir
suhligther
suMigtir
stidigter
.sMdigther
suidig tes"
168. lmperfect (ahvays eonjunct).
Sg. 3 .carthae .léh'the .stddigthe
Pl. 3 .cartais .&:i«ts .sm'digti.
92
169. Future, absolute.
Sg. 3 carfidb" léicfidir
rel. cmfedar léicfed««r
Pl. 3 carftir léi«:fitir
tel. cm:fret, -fetar .léiçliler, -fetar
conjunct.
Sg. 3 .cafider .léi«:fider
Pl. 3 .carfite; -fetar .léhfiter, -fetar
suMigfdb"
suhtigfedar
suidigfit5"
suidigfite;
-Jëtar
.suMigfider
.mddigfi ter,
-fetar
170. Future Preterite (always conjuuct).
Sg. 3 .cmfde .léie./ide
Pl. 3 .«a:titi. .léh:fitis
171. Preterite, absolute.
Sg. 3 carthe léicthe
Pl. 3 (r'arthni) (léicthi)
eonjuuet.
Sg. 3 .c(trad .léiced
Pl. 3 .cartha .léicthea
.su id igfid e
..«uMigfitis
s.uMigthe
(mtMigthi)
.mddiged
..uidigthea
Perfect.
Formed from the pret. by means of fo witb infixed 1»1"o
nouns of 1st aud 2nd pers. sg. and pl.
Sg. l ro-m.charad
2 ro-t.charad
SUBJUNCTIVE.
172. Present, absolute.
Sg. 3 «ttrthair Iéb'tbir
rel carthar Iéi«ther
Pl. ro-n.enrad
ro-b.carad
ro.cc«rtha
suidigthir
suidigther
suMi9tir
suidigter
"suidigther
"mddigter
93
173. Preterite 6dways coujuuct).
Sg. 3 .carthae .léiclhe .subliflhe
Pl. 3 .carrais .h;i«ti. .sMditi
174- IMPRATIV (abs. & eonj.).
Sg. 3 carthar léicthcr mtMigther
Pl. 3 carter l(i«ter mtidigter
175. Past Participle Passive.
carthae léicthe stidigthe
Participle of Necessity.
ca rthai léicthi
sMdi,jthi
Verbal Noun.
ca rad léiciad suidigud
. ca.rtho,-a iéiclheo,-ea suidigtheo,-ea
Paradigm of Strong verbs.
Active : INDICATIVE.
176. Present, a.bsolute.
B I. B II. B IV.
Sg. 1 biru gaibim be»aim.
2 bi»" (beri) gaibi benai
3 berid gaibid benaid
rel. beres gaibes be»as
Pl. 1 bermai gaib»i ben»i
rcl. ber»ae gaib»e ben»e
2 berthe gaibthe be»te
3 berait gaibit be»ait
rel. bertae gaibte bente
177. conj unct.
g 1 "biur .gaibim (.benaim)
2 .bi»" .gaibi .be»ai
3 .beir .gaib .ben
(encl..be)
t'l. 1 .beram .gaibem. .be»am
2 .berid .gaibid .benaid
3 "bera t .gaibet .bena t
Examples : biru ' I bear,' gaibim ' I take,' benai» ' I
strike.'
94
178. Imperfect (always conjunct).
Sg. 1 .berimt .9aibimt .benaimt
2 .bertha (.gaibth ca) .beta
3 .bered .gaibed .benad
Pl. 1 .bermis .gaib,nis .bemHs
2 .bertbe .9aiblbe .beMe
3 .bertis .gaibti.¢ .be»,tis
179. Future, absolute.
Substituting guidim (B III.) and renaim (B IV.) for
9aibim and benaim.
Sg. 1 béra gi9.ea (rirea)
2 bérae (gi9s'i) (rire)
3 bé»'aid 9igis riri
tel. béras gges rires
Pl. 1 bérmai gig.immi (rb'mi)
rcl. bermae (gig.imme) (rb'me)
2 bérthae gigeste (rirthe)
3 bérait gig.it ririt
tel. bértae gigsite fritte)
180. Future Preterite (always eonjunct) with ithim for
benaim.
Sg. 1 .bérainn .gig.imt (.[..aim,)
2 .bértha "gi,desta (.[.sta)
3 .bérad .gig.s.ed .[..ad
Pl. 1 .bgrmis .gigsimmis (.i..-mai.Q
2 .bérthe .gigeste (.L.tae)
3 .bértis .gig.itis .[..tais
95
181. Preterite, absolute, with guidbn for bena[m.
Sg. 1 *bb'ttt
2 *berli
3 birt
l'el. be'tae
Pl. 1 *berlimmb"
rel. *bertemmar
2 *bertithe
3 *bertir
l'el. bertar,-atar
Sg. 1 .bert, .bho't
2 .birt
3 .bert
Pl. 1 .bertanmar
2 .bertaid
3 .bertatar
Sg. 1
3
tel.
PI. 1
3
l'el.
Sg. 1
2
3
Pl. 1
2
3
5UBJ UNCTIVE.
Present, absolute, with guidim for benaim.
benaim.
lies.si
eisa.
9e.
ges'm i
geste
ve.s'.sit
9EEeste (bete)
(.béu)
(.biae)
.bia
.biam
«.biai d
(.bi, t)
encl. "ber
96
t3.
Sg. 1 .berimt
"2 .be 't ha
3 .berad
Pl. 1 .bermis
2 .berthe
3 .bertis
Preterite (ouly conjunct).
185. Passive : INDICATIVE.
Present, absolute.
Sg. 3 bercb" 9aibtbir benair
tel. be»'a" 9aibther benar
t»l. 3 bertair 9aibtir bentir
tel. bertar 9aibter bentar
conjunct.
Sg 3 .berar .9aibther .be»mr
Pl. 3 .bertar .gaibter,-etar .be»tar
I86. lmperfect (always conjunct).
97
188. Future Preterite (always conjuuct).
Sg. 3 .bérthe (.gébthe) bethe
encl..baide
Pl. 3 .bérti. (.gebti.) bct
189. Preterite, absolute.
Sg. 3 brethae gabthae (b[the)
Pl. 3 brelh,i gabthai b[thi
conjlmct.
S. 3 .breth .gabad .bith
Pl. 3 .brctha .gablha .belh,
Subjunctive: present as in Indicative abs. and conj. ;
preterite as in iml»crf, indicative ; imperative as lu pres.
indicative conjunct.
190. Past participle Passive.
(brethe) encl..berthe (gaibthe) bilhe
Participle of Necessity.
(brethi) encl..berthi (gatblhi) bethi
Verbal Noun.
breth, brith gabdl béAmm
G. brilhe gabdlae béimme
191. The Verb ' to be.'
The verb has two series of forms: one series contains
the forms which denote existence--the substantive
verb ; the other sees is composed of forms whieh are used
merely to connect subject with predicate--the copula:
the forons of the copula are always weakly accented (pro-
clitic). The vcrb is built up by cmploying several diffcrent
l'oots in the sênse of 'being': thus, thê substantive verl)
employs thê roots .t5 (Lat. s'tS-re), cl (W. gwel-ed 'to
see '), bhFt (Skr. bhdc-ati, Gl« :-otat, Lat. fit-i)'to
corne ' : the copula employs, in addition to bhff and s.t5, the
g
9
Id G. root e.u ' to be ' ; cf. French, Ittliall and C4el'nlan use
of se troueer, .tar, uld sh'h be.li»den in the sense of
"being' ; also the difl'erent roots in English ara, be, wa..
SUBSTANTIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE.
Present from /st««.
conjunct.
1 .tdu, .t6, -t{t Pl..tatt»
f .taaid, .taaith
2 .toi [.taid, .taad
3 .td .taat, .tdt
The usual form is attd, atd<*ad-st55, but the prep. ad
is dropped when a conjunct particle precedes the verb, e.g.
Mdt 'in which I ara,' h6-taat 'from which they are.'
With ol or ht 'than' the following forms are round : sg. 1.
olddu (old6), 2. olda[ (oltrd), 3. tel. oldaa.s, idaas ; pl.,
3. old5tae (olddta), i»ddtae : the 1st and 2nd sg. olddu,
oldai may mean either 'than I,' 'than thou,' or 'than
mine,' 'than thine': an abs. form of the 3rd sg. tdith is
round in poetry with suffixed 1)ronouns (v. § 87). The
relative passive form is round written datha" (d = nasalized
t), e.g.i.s hed dc«thar dom Wh. 21 c 9, dathar dFtn, Wb.
28d4.
193. Present from /tcl
Fil (fel, feil, later rail), tel. file, ,fele, is used for
ail numbers and persons: _QOl'_igillall_v /1 w§
imperative='lo !' a.ld ±hç oldest use is xith sufiàxecï ,
pronouns; e.../il-us 'there are' (lit,, 'behold them'
'/'he etymology or fil explains the fact that it takes
the accusative case after it, e.g. i .fil aimsir (N.
aim.,er)'there is hot a time.' With infixed pronouns:
e.g. con-dumJël 'so that I ara,' co»-dib.feil 'so that ye
are,' ci-ni-ri.fil 'though we are hot.' N.B.--nt-s.fil'they
«tre hot,' |)eside ni-s.tti, 'they ltc«'e hot.' Relative use:
99
.fil or file, e.g., a fil 'which is,' .m«d .lïh' 5enlid eter
baullu 'as there is uuity l»etween meml,evs,' im/. fi'r fi'l
«tnd ' of the men who are there,' a-rrad .17le «t»tl .om, ' tho
grace which is in him,' immib remluib fitil ha. 9réin 'iu
the stars which are al»ove th« sun.' In question and
allSwel', e.g. in fil{ fil 'Is there ! Ves (therc is).'
194
Sg. 1
3
|'ci.
t'l. 1
re].
3
re].
Sg. 3
Tenses from
Consuetudinal Present.
Absolute.
bhtu
(b[)
b[id, -ith
bi.,.
b[mmi
biit
b[te
bithir
('ollj :lllçt.
.bh/
.bi
bi (cm'l. -bai)
b/rit, .bbtt (em.1. -bOt)
195.
S»z. I
3
196.
sg. 1
3
tel.
PI. 1
Fit|.
.b[inn
.b[th
bia
biae
bieM, bied
bia.
bemmi
bethi
bieit, bict
bete
lmperfect.
Pl. l
"2 .b[ti.
Future.
hot fonnd
"bict
"bia
"bi, m
"bieid, "bied
"biat
10o
197. Future Preterite (eonjunet ouly)
Sg. l .beinn. PI..be»nm
3 .biad .betis
The iufixcd l,ronouns at'e addd fo thc forms of the
future of the substautive verl, 1,y means of fo instead of
no: in the fut. l,reterite they are itfixed I»y either fo or
no, e.g., fo-m-bi, "I shall have.' r«,-»-bi, d or to-m-bbtd
'1 should have.'
198.
Sg. 1 "bd, encl. -ba
" -bS, eucl.-ha .baid, eucl.-baid
3 "bol .bai, encl.-b,« .bdl, r, encl.-batar,
Passive.
both.
Thc only absolute forms occurriug are sg. 3 ho[
boie ; pl. 3 b6tar ; pass. bolbae, rel. bolh«t.
Preterite.
co,.imct.
1'1..bS»zar, enel.-bamm«tr
199. INIPERATIVE.
Sg. 2 bi b[icl (.bith)
3 bith, bhl bhtt
SUBJUNCTIVE.
200. Present.
Sg. 1 beu, beo (.bé,, beo)
2 bee
3 b«ith, beid .bé (encl. -b)
beth, bed
rcl. be.
PI. 1 bemmi .hem (enel. -bain)
2 herbe .beith, .beid (enel. -bith)
3 beït .bel (end. -bat)
rel. bete
Passive.
bethir .bether
101
201.
Sg.
3
202.
Preterite.
1 (.bêbm) I'1..bcmm
betha .bethe
beth, .bed, encl.-bad .beh:
Participle of Necessity.
bMthi.
Verbal Noun.
buitb (both, bitb, beitb). (:. buithe.
2 af, it
3i.
rel. as
TIIE COPUI,A.
INDICATIVE.
Present, al»solute.
Pl. ammi. ammin
,dib. idib
it
atrt, rtt (MI.).
Peculiar forms of the rel, 3rd sg. and 1,1. are used after
ci,, ce 'although,' and md, ma ff, e.g. sg. cta-.-u (cesu,
ma-s-u (massu, ma.'o), in 3II. c[aa, nasa ; pl.
ce-t-u" (ceto), »m-t-u'. The 1,alatal vowel of , it is pro-
hal,ly due to their frequent use with the prons, hé, hed.
204. conjnnct.
There are two distinct sei'ies of forms riz. (a) those used
after the negative d, (b) those used in cases where the
longer forms of the infixed pronouns would be employed
102
lq thc (b) stries the 3rd sg. is solnetimes reduced fo
c.g. dian-t aimm, and sometimes disappears, e.g. ar5. in,
aeb. After amal 'as' persons which have no special
relative forms l,refix m, c.g. sg. 1 and 2 no-n-@, pl. 1
n«»n-dan, 2 no-n-dad, but 3r, l sg. ,mal
(lt(I ll.
After the nentive nd in leniting relative sentenees, s. 8
»dd, i»1. 8 notat:in mtsalizinl¢ relative sentenees sg. 3
çe-n 'Mflough uo' mM ma-n 'if no' rd sg.
The (a) forms are front /.xt wih he exception of the
3rd sg. where ,[ (geminating)<.nZr<nZsl<%w e.s'l : in
the (b) forms the -d- is an infied pranoun, and the archaie
forms -d-em, -d-ed, -d-et show tha they do hot behmg to
n/sld. ]»u to n/ es. The ehmge in the termination «ff the
ls pl. gara < t,l is dle to thc influence of thc infixed pro-
noun of tlw 1st l,l.
205.
Consuetudinal Present.
Only the 3rd sg. bi (with short ï as distinct froln 3rd
sg. co6. of suhst, verh) ; e.g. ni-pi 91,,'e, ui-l)i clan 'it
does hot be elear,' 'it. does hot he long,' coin-bi de.g'ciln,l
so that he beconles a disciple, ('«,m-bi (lia. mdr ' so that
if becomes a gvcat ear.'
206. Future.
absolute, conjunct.
Sg. 1 5e
3 bid, bitb -ha,
rel. be., bas
Pl. 1 bemmi, bim,, bami
3 bit -bat. -pat
rel. beta
207. Future Preterite.
Sg. 3. ahs. bed, con.j. -bad,-pad:l,l. 3r,1 conj.
-pti., with infixêd lle|. l,ronom, ro»di. <*ro-m-bdi..
103
208.
absolnte.
4g. 1 ba.a
2 (bas.a)
3 ha
tel. ha
Pl. 1 (bammar)
3 bat[r, batar
tel. b««tar
Preterite and Imperfect.
«onjunct.
-b,a, -psa,
-b., -po, -bt,
bonl lna r, -blon nlar
-b[ar, -plat, -lar, -dar
c[a (ce) takes the eonjunct forms, e.g., cia-bo, cia-l,tar.
.qome forms arc mueh disguised owing to phonctie
changes, e.g. sg. 1 rom bilhbéu where rom=rom-b, 2
romsa = vo-m-b-.a, 11. 3 romtar, comlar = ro-m-btar, con-
btar: the -sa of sg. 1 and 2 is the emphatie particle. The
3rd sg. abs. and eonj. is used also in a conditional sensc.
209. IMPERATIVE.
Pl. 1 ban, badn
Sg. 2 ba 2 bad, bed
3 bed, bad 3 bat.
210.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
absolute conjunct
Sg. 1 ba -ba
2 ba -ba
3 ba (b('t) I-b,-p,-dib,-dip
rel. bes, bas t-ho, -po
Pl. 1 not found -ban
2 bede -bad
3 hot found -bat
rel. bete, beta, bata.
Before the conjunct forms nani and ara n usually become
shortened fo main, af ', e.g. main-ha, arm-ba <arn-ba ;
104
l,efore the 3rd sg. ara" becomes ari n, e.g. arimp, ab'ndip
< %drin-p, arin-dip : co" becomes coin except before 3rd
sg. e.g. tomba, combad, and the forms may be writtcn
phonetically, e.g. comman=com-ban. The form of the
3rd sg. -dib, -d[p is used after ara", fo", i ' 'in which,'
and sometimes after in (interl'og,) and «« e.g. arn-dip,
r,m-dib, in-dib, in-dip, m,-dip; the form -b, -p is used
after fo, h, )d, m, ce (interrog.) and serhi 'whoever,'
e.g. rob, top; imb, imp ; db, dp ; mb, )mip ; ,'lb,
.echip: further vo-po, cor-bu <¢co"-ro-bu, d-bo; with
bds 'pcrhaps,' bé.s.-q bé.«-o: with cia 'although,' and ma
"if' s.g. 3 «hl, «ith, ,'ed, ceith, »md, pl. 3 oit, mat.
211.
a|»solute
Sg. I hot round
2 hot round
re.}bid, bed, bad
Pl. 1 bemmi.% bimmis
3 bitis, betis
Preterite.
conjuuct
-bin, -benn
-ptha
-bad, -bed
-bdi.% -pti.', (-d i.% -ti.).
Examples : com-bin or commin, ni-ptha main-bad,
commimmi& coni-pt, comtis, airmdis or ardis.: with
and ma sg. 3 cid, mad, pl. 3 mati.s..
212. Other compounds from 4/sui.
(ar-td) rel. ara-thd ' which is left ;' d[-td = Lat. distare
'stands apart,' 'differs,' e.g. dl-taam gl. on c,li:ta»ms,.
dl-thdt ' they do hot difl'er ': te.,.-ta < do.e.'-ta lS wantng,'
is lacking.'
213. Further Forms used as Verbs of Existence.
1. Adcomnicc < Sad-co,n-dn-icc (lit. 'it happened') used
as copula: this form is used with infixed pronouus to
express existence, e.g. ,_etanta atomchomnaic-se ( < ad-
dom-chom-n-ic) 'I ara Setanta': (later) atancomnaig 'we
are.'
1()5
2. Dicoissin, docoissin: au impcrsomd form used
relatively in thc sense of 'is,' 'exits' (subst. verb), e.g.
a,,l do-n-coi.in 'as we are' ,rnab tih'b (',»actib
dic]«,i.s[n in, nim ' for all the powcrs that exist in hcaven,'
«««1 ram »wh't dt«lo[.Mn 'every 1,art of strength that
therc is,' «i« lb" ba[rd d,»«u/«/n 'how mauy (kinds of)
bards arc thcre ?'
3. Dixnigur<*di-co2Mn-[gur: a dcponent formed from
dS'oi.sh; it is uscd both as subst, verb and copula, e.g.
in «l 'mged, r ' ( hwst )
ne«h 'that there is
' wh» thou art' (as copula).
4. ondgab: .o-prcterite of gaibl» with infixcd l,ro-
noun 3 sg. n. (as subst, verb): form used in mtsa]iziug
relative sentences, e.g. cé[n 'o(d).g««bus i carca[r 'while
I ara in prison,' amal rond.gab
gabsat ' it is clcar th:tt thcy are.'
214. DEFECTIVE VEIB.
Therc are several verbs which, like the verb 'to
construet th«ir forms from more thau one foot: cf. Lat.
jëro, hdi, lahtm ; Gk. çép(o, oi'o-o,. çireyr,t ; Eug. go, cent.
the following list they are arranged in «dphaletical order
accordiug to the initial letter of their present stems.
bertd 'bears': as a simplc verb bas no fo- forms, it
emldoys iustead a weak verb ro.uccni, 'u«eai, pl..rm'at,
pret. id. sg. 1 ro.tdec[u.u. 3 ro.«iee, ro.tee, .rtec, I d. .re.at,
1,ass. 'o.cad, .r«ed, pl. .o.uctha, 'tctIa, subj..rcca..
l»ret, sul»j, l)ass..ructh««e, I d. "rucai. : also in the compouud
trem[.betr ' bears over,' fo- pret. pass. tremi.rw«d.
d(,.beir ' brings,' 'gives' : l»rototon..tabai% fut. tibéra
ro-forms, (a) in the sense of 'bring,' d,,-uccai, twcai, pass.
.t«cth«r, lwct. iud. dwdc, hdcc, tuc, l,l. t«csot, pass.
tu«ad, subj..t«cca, imp. t«ic : (b) in the seuse of 'give,'
do.rati, l)t, iud. sg. 1 do.ratu.', 2 do.ratai., 3
prototon..tarot, pl. 1 tb).r«t.am, 2 (lo.raL'id, 3 d«,.ratsat
prototou..tart.'at and .t««rti..«et, pass. do.ratad : l«'ototon.
106
t«tvd«td, pl. do.»'atct, prototon..t«t»'to, suhj. do.rrtta, pss
ta»'ta»': the eOmlotmds c«..bei»" alld a»'.bei»" have fo- forlns
ad-ci 'sees' : lwototon..ab'ci, sg. 1 ad.e:u, 1,l.
pass. ad.cilhe»', lwotoon. -,««o.ttt»', fu. (ad.eh'bi), pass.
ad.«irhe.t«t', lwe$. pass. c«l.,'e.., subj. ad.eea»', 3 lwototon.
accorda»" ('nce«lha»'), pass. ad.,'ethe»', l,rogoton.
preg. subj. ,d.eeth (.ced) : lu t.he l,ret, act.. for the »'o- form
ig employs /derk, ad.eon-dirE, lmvrative pret., eon.o«eoe,
pres. laSS, with »'o- of possibility ad.»'o-d«t»'c¢t»': do.éi-ci
<de.en-ei 'looks at.' has the usual vo-fol'ms, e.g. pret.
3rd pl. d,,.»'-éeato»', sulO. sg. 2
<fNtb-,d-ci 'hopes" h«s movable ».o, e.g. pret. 3rd 1,1.
.i.'a«al¢r', nL».u .l)'e«ra«httr.
cuiretnr ' purs ' 'throws' : snbj..coratha»', imp.
2 cuirthe and cuire, pl. eui'kl; the absolute fovm
SUlllied by Jb.ceird (v. Table of strong" vorbs) : the 'o-
fol'ms are SUlplie«l by v-I-, e.g. preg. iml. 'o-l«, lWototou.
'Cdae, pl..».al«at, 'ol.c«t, pss. »'a.laod, lwototou.
'olad, sulO. sg. I -'aL 3 .rela : the eoml,ound do.cui»'etha"
in the sense 'takcs to himself,' ' adopts,' has ro-forms
fug. e.g. do.»'o-chui»'semma»', do.eui»'tf««»', but in the sense
' tlwows aw«y' perf. pass. do.»'alad, fng. preg. do.fo[ehved
< do'f,-eieh »'ed (fo.ceird).
.to.gnib ' fids ': sulti..»gaba, fug. fi»géba ; but pret.
f».funir, l,rotoon. «ei»', pss..tb'j)'[th, prototon..f'[th.
con.ic'is l)le,' in ghe fol'ms in whieh the stem loses
ghe principal eeeng icc gives place go /ong- and con. to
coin., e.g. pres. iu«l. sg. 1 con.icimm, 3 con.iec, pl. eon.eeat,
prototon, sg. 1 .ctt»grtim (.cumctt), 3
pl..çttntgal , .eumeat:fut. sg. 1 cot'b'td), prototon,
gub, fut.. lweg. «on.iefi'd, prototon "cumeaibed; lWeg. con-
dnaeui»', prototon. .ço[ntnctett[': subi. con.[, lwototon,
cumEi, .cure, pre. pl. 1 eon.Lmi., protoou..cuimsimm[.:
do.ecmning< to-en-ço»t-ong- ' happeus' nmkes
pret. do.eemoi.ed; fn'.comnncuir 'ha eome about," sul 6.
pret..
ithid "eats': suhj..e.tar, fut. pret. pl. 3 .[.s'tm., l,art
pass. ei«.e, «/ed- : pret...dol, .duaid, pl. 3 do.]çot««r.
jed, redupl.
téit, conj..tdt: ff'oto x/steitlh l,res, sg. 1 "ti««gu, .t[ag,
I. 3 ti(«gait, .t[agat, impf..téged, pres. pass..t[agar, iml,.
sg. l t[ag, t[acl k,l. 1 t[ogc«m, 3 t[agat, p«tss, tiagor, suli.
téis, .tdi, pl. t[a.ctt, In'et. suhj..tdsed: /reg. imp. sg. "2
eirg, pl. "2 (later) ertlid fut..rega, .riga, fut. In'et..regad :
lud (cf. (41« ,0o,), pret. luid, pl. lotar: /ei (cf. (k.
e, I,at. e-o, Skr. ê-mi), pass. etlc«e: the r«»forms are
construeted ff'oto x/e¢l with the preps, de and «o,u, suli.
and fut. do.ço[ *dç.cnm-zod.st, prototou..d««ha, .di«l,
"dig, pl. 1 .deçh.««u, pret. subi. and fut. pl. do.co[st,
prototon..dech.aiti., .di«h«it, pret. irai. sz. 1 and 2
do.cood, "cood, prototon..decluul, 3 d«.«o)?l, prototon.
deçhuid, pl. 1 .de«lu»uuar, 2 ,.digtitl, 3 .d«m,tar,
tut: the eompolmd do.tét cornes' is eonjugated like
the simple rerb, but. the prototon, forms Beeome sg. 1
.ta[g, .tdey, 3 .tait, p! .t««[g««t, sub. sg. 1 .rai.s., 3 .lai, fut.
terg«t, .tirga, pret. ind. pl..tultatar; fo- forms prototon.
pre. sg. 1 .tuid«'lted, pl..tm'dçltetor, sul{i, .tuidt, pret.
tuidçlttsed, pl. 1 .tmlte.mct[ < .tm'ddte.s.ucu%: imp.
9 toit (./retlt-), Velsh tçred. Further eompounds are
[td-od-tét goes h,' pres. pl. 3 i.otgat, fu. as in sult.
pl. 3 i.ot.at, mrr. ln'e, i.olaid, perf. in.ralaid ;
goes round,' nm'r. pret. pl. 3 rel. [mme-lotar, perf. pi. 3
[m-ruldatar, fut. wih çom- sg. 3 cou.imtltae;cot.{-tét
< com-eu-tét 'is indulgent to,' prototou..coétt pl. '2
con.éitgid, imp. sg. 3 .coméitged, suivi, sg. "2
3 cou.éit: for-tét 'helps' and reui.tét goes belote, are
eonjugated like the silnple verh.
falls : ln'oOoton .luit, pl..tuitet,
do.tuit, hter dodt, '
pass .tuiter, suli, sg. 1 do.ro-tluu.so, 3 .totl, pl. 1 .tor-
th.em, 3 .todsat, .totsat, fuL. do.toetl : pi'et, formed ff'oto
do.cer, with fo, do.ro-cloir, prototon..torcIl(tr, .torcIla[r.
108
109
110
111
112
VIII.--THE PREPOSITIONS.
215. The f,,'ms of some prel,osilsi«ms vary accor, ling to
position (i.e. aeeented or unaeeented). Thurneysen {Hh.
. 812) distingnishes four principal positions:
A aeeented, eompounded with nouns or verbs.
B unaeeented, proelitie belote a dcuteroton, verb. form.
C unaccented, proclitic belote their case.
D accented, with suttixed personal l)ronouns.
Similarity of function or accentuation has caused nlany
aualogical changes, D heing influenced hy C, A (in verl)al
coml)ounds) by B, and B by C.
216. ad 'to,' Lat.
A. ad (=«t): before vowels and origiual -g (which
1)ccomes ]), e ,d-amrae ' wondcrful.' do.ad-bat 'shews':
the d hecomes assimilated to b, c,
< «td-bai,j (b,mid ' rêaps') ' ripe,' .acci < Sad-cl ' secs.'
«ttai,t (t=d) <ad-d«tim 'concedes,' ocre (ad-g«tire
' suing,' ammt. ad-me.. ' attempt,' do«tis.elbi < 'ad-
selbi'assigns,' «ttr«& <«td-tveb 'dwelling': before l, ,
it hecomes d, e.g. f,).dlgim <.«td-logim 'l cast down,"
5i,.em < ad-ness- ' accusation,' «'t»'(t» ad-r[m- ' 1111111-
ber': td+od >(tud in atdbirt (A. s.u.) 'sacrifice' (from
«td.opuir < «td-od-ber-) later edbavt, idbart.
B. ad : even 1)efore consonants, e.g. ad.rirai 'reckons,
ad.cobva ' wishes,' ad.midctbct v ' attemps,' the assimilation
of «td + s >«ts. has caused it o become confused with the
prep. «t.¢ (e.s), hence forms like «ts.roilli heside ad.roilli;
before the infixed pron. 3rd. sg. in relative construction
«t. frequently replaces -d, e.g. tt.u.id-ci(ttl
C. D. ad is only used in nomiual and verhal compomd,
before nomes and suffixed pronoms it is replaced by
(v § 222).
217. air, (er, lr, &c.) Lat. p,,r-, Gk. r,«.og, r, dO.
A. «tir with palata! »" or er, b" with Unl)alatal ', e.g.
airdivc or erdrtirc êonspicuons, falnolls': before
113
usually af, e.g. t-ar-'-«hct but also t-air-r-cher 'has beeu
prophcsied" ; before od aud.f» it beeolues ara'-, e.g. am't«rau
< air-od- or airç/,- +,re..- 'rtmnin, baste.'
B. af, e.g. af.if ' finds,' ar'ffair ' forbids,' ar.beir ' ex-
lwesses'; in l'elative sentcnces usually ara, e.g. ara-thd
' whieh is left..'
C a«', with the dative nd aeeustive.
D. only with the aceustive ; for fOrlnS see 90.
217a meanins of ar.
(a) before, e.g..r sil'bcfol'e the eye,' af mcmmtin
l)efol'e tlle mimi.'
(5) for, e.g. af /Sff 'for reward,' ,r «httiri 'for a
1[1.O[]1. '
(«) on account of, e.g. af formait 'on accomt of envy,'
af (']iroi«h cr[st 'on accouut of the c1"o88 o[ Christ,' airi
on that account.'
(d) trom, e.g. 'oh'ad af ffutw,«ht 'deliverance [rom
dungcr,' arcelith af chSch 'ye Lke awy front every ont.'
(c) in the place o[, 'epre.entinff, e.g. dcich m/li bria-
thar af labrad ilbélre, '"ten thousand words" for
"speaking nmny tongues".'
218. atth 'a«dn, ve-' l,at. ,t, Wclsh at.
A. ait/{ and ,bi" : e.g. aithffte or ,Mff,e ' recognition' ;
s-metimes aih, ad hefore a nOn-l»alatal anlaut, e.g. ath-
ch,,»t,«.h 'reconstruction,' t-tdh-Sir ' hlamc'; with assimi-
lati«»n lefi,re a following dental at, irbert aith-to-ah'-
bert : an older rotin occurs in aithe-sc 'answer,' cf: (btulish
Ate-ffnatm.
B. ad, e.g. ad.ffainemmar 'we are I»o]'n again'; with
ssimilation «dctirbir < * aith-to««5"-bir.
C. D. do hot occur.
219 «en ' without.'
C. with accusative (lelfitillg), e.g. ce»t chaille 'without a,
veiI.'
D. with suflixed pronouns, see§ 89.
h
114
219a. further meanings of cen.
(et) apart from, e.g. ,16 brithem
is « judge there «q}art, fvom thee.'
(b) hot, wit, h verbal nouu, e.g. ce»t d[lfftd '
forgive,' cent chomalad 'no to fuifil.'
2. cenmtth ' except., besicles.'
This is compouud of ce»t in the form cemni (cf.
ve»d, tvemi) + -t6 ' is.'
C. with aceusat, ive: «e»tmitl«[ étcad 'excep lus,'
«'e»mith« in »-ai»o»dd ' exeept the uom.,' also cenmath6,
«'e»m6, e.g. cemath6 i» tegdais -ucut 'hesides yonder
bouse,' ce»m6 i»
221. cét- 'with,' Gk. «r6, Welsh
Only in compounds with the substantive verb.
A. «ét-, e.g. cdtbdd < cét-b-uith ' sense,' (Welsh catfod).
B. ceto, cit,, e.g. ceta.bl 'perceires, experiences,' perf.
g. 1 cit,.ro-ba.
222. co, Welsh py.
C. co u (cu) with accusative, e.g. co-llae 'until he day.'
«ossb ' to the.'
D. see89. A.B. replaced hy
2a. meanings of co.
(a) until, e.g. co Cvist ' until Christ,' cossa laa-sa ' until
this day.'
(b) to, e.g. d t&'t co le»" »i-aile 'goes hot to anot.her
man,' dohfad cuc,n» 'tiret he would corne to us.'
(c) durntton, e.g. cid co h-6i»" ' even for an hour.'
(d) extent, e.g.i. «o bi osbévam a aill 'it is unto
stupidity that we shall say something else.'
2. coin 'with,' Lat. coin-, «o-,
A. coin (» =t): before vowels aud /, z, v; sometimes
,¢m when the following vowel is e, or lt, e.g. com-oiqe
' there
no to
' advice,' «omal»milhir ' fulfils,' ctim-re«h 'i,ond,'
' l,ower,' ««mta,'h <*com-«d-d,«b 'i,uihling' : com-imm
bccomes culture, e.g. «omtbe«bt 'aecomr, anyin#,'
< -ço»-e»ta ' protect,' «om-im,-air«ide ' «ompetens' is a
llew formatiol.
Before the other cosonants «o»t (coin hef. b): e.g. «ombach
bath ' in'eaking," (y.n. of cowbobg), comlelg 'compu'ison,'
«onff»t(¢m "helps.'
Before c and t : co ', e.g. corad (SOmlded co-) <
' warfare,' c¢trt««s (Somlded r,d-)
«oct«rt <*coin- cert ' correct '.' ; hefore
<*com-.amil 'like'; beforc f (original L«): co, ct«, with
loss of m, eg. ad.ctaid<*.com-«hl-'has tohl,'
<*com-ytid-'bas gone," but also b
< com:fi¢. "conscience,' c,baid <*com-fid ' harmouious.'
lu htter eompouuds the form con" is found belote ail con-
souants exeel,t m and b, e.g. «om-thitdl 'ga.thering,'
«om-cb6tbttid " cousetsus,' co-.q«itlig,d 'composition," the
lenition is analogicl.
B. co»t : corairleci 'l,ernits,' cot.boitg ' i,reaks,'
certat 'they correct,' co»t.d 'seeks.'
l"
C. co" (ct) with datire, e.g. co »-a«e«rbi' with »tteress,
co fiilti ( f= ff) " with joy.'
D. it is hot joiued fo suxed l,ronouns; ifs l,laee is
supplied by la.
2. di, de. I.at. de.
A. dï belote cousonauts (de 1,efore nOn-l,alatal ch and
1,efore '(o) ), e.g. d(-gal ' vengeance,' di-thrt«b ' wilderness,'
but de-chor " difl'erence,' dermat < çde-ro-n6t ' forgetting,'
di hefore vowels, e.g. di-tdl 'deelension,' dg in later
eoinings as equivalettts for Lat. e.g. dé-aimeicbtech
'dcuominativum,' de-chom.thligtbi 'deeoml,osita': d belote
tç e.g. dé«ce (di-en-), .d6rig (di-ess-), but d[titt <*di-étitt :
with fo it beeomes tl <*de-yo, but also remains as in
di«tag (di:fo--tig-) possibly after the analogy of di-«d-as
in di«p,rt <*di-t¢d-be»'t.
116
B. d,,, dt: e.g. do.gJK 'd,es,' d,».ella 'dceliues,'
mtch ' I wash off' but also as in
rogb,d, de.mcccim, di.mec«ither beside do.mmeiccithcr.
C di, de, e.g. di ,'horp 'de corpore,' de Ittdé[b 'of the
3ews ; also as iu B, e.g. bec»-do [d ' little o[ peaee.'
D. sce
224a meanngs oï
(et) as ablatve, e.g. di ,.«««h leith ' ff'oto ecry side,'
po.wi 'from thc positive.'
(b) origan or materal, e.g.i. di
cborc,,' btide 'it is from a plan$ that the yellow purple
lli«t [t. '
(e} concerninK, e.g. di ch«r, chtr«ib 'ahou Ietters.'
di htitbitt brdtho ' «ouceruiug the day of judDnent.'
(d) partitive Kenitive, c.. itt[to.c]treitjèddiib 'he of
them who slmuld believe." i bec« prid«himme-ni di
Dwe 'i is little we p'each o[ the msteries of (lod' di
«bti5 do Thit 'Titus ,,-as of the Gentiles,'
di m«id dmb ' lle llas giveu us ranch of good.'
(e) causal, e.g. di bar n-lt'e 'because of yonr salvation,'
ter »t,pttt toir.i«'h dLm-«'htimreffaib-se 'lest they be sad
because of my
(.f) instrumentai, e.g. «,,-tob-.e«l{lide»" di
will I»e eorreeted by a correction.' di
the fruit of out hands,' for «le with the eompanttie of adjs
v. ïT.
225. ectr 'outside,' lat.
A. only in nominal eOml.mnds, e.g.
' «dienigcua, uit-laurier.'
G. with accus«ti'e, e.g. "Fur. 10s,
gl. e,'bt¢t»" comtirbirt mbitth l»e«'th,e hirobamm,r ' out-
side the pr.tice of the sins wherein wc had been,'
'e«]tt " outside thc la'.'
Also with aecusative s-echtar (motion outwards), e..
set'btar it «h'gdai. (teld, i.) 'out o[ the h,use.'
D. uor found.
117
226. ess
A. es- (c..-) before vowels Uld c, s, 1, e.a'. es.s-éire
,]'e8IIl'l'ectio] 1'
l,OW ont '.' t-cs-ta
of B, e.g. a[.mH., .aisudet aftev the
Befin'e the other eonsomt.ts t,ks is reduced to «ek and
the uHal phonet.ic changes fi,llow: e.g. with ainfil:ttion
to foilowing voiced stol,s,
Q«rt (p=bb) <«ek-bert
beeomes tç
"weak,' tzrh'« 'paymeHt." IH latcr formatioHs es-, e.ff.
cs-b,e like t-c«-bui[h ri'oto te.si,. <w-rç«h[,id 'exlex.'
. ets- (,.s-), c.g. as.beir ' sys,'
agTEEiH,' <ts.r<'+t pays ohé: tel. somctimcs t«..a- whieh
Sl.,reads te»
is fre,0mntly
stead .f .tir <-ek-bir 'thou sayest': lwfiwe infixed prons.
with d- + eks becomes t[ (add) by ssimilatim e],'.v-d- > eff-d-
>edd-> l,v-clitic «¢dd-, thus coineiding with the forms
from tul, hence c.nfusion of forms as «¢..s'hl (tel.) for adhl.
C. a : befin'e a notre in the dtive, e.g. t« oen[u (prou.
< hca[u) ' ex unitate,' alla[in ' fr<,m (the) Latin,"
',ut of the midsC : ass bcfore l,roclit, ies as the art. and
prons., e.g. tts mo chuimriib 'out of my bouds,' ,s. a
th6ib out of his side,' as i»,l Jëtarlt+h'i ' out of the Old
Testament,' as cech .s.ét 'from every ro<l.'
D. see 88. The form as.a « used with comparatives
(v. 77) is probably
tlSstl-Illlç.S<l (Vb. 30 c 25)would mean lit. 'tley will
heeome worse out c,f their worse' (Bergin).
227.
eter, etar, I,t..
A. elar hefore ('oll.qOllHIItS, e.g. el.r-,J»W 'kllowledge,'
etav-t.ert (twice eter-) ' illterlwetation" : in later glosses a|so
]eniting. e.g. elrtr-th«dhai.t 'dowHfall" I,cftn'e a vowel
«tf- in «lr-.nt¢wh " i}termittet."
ll,q
B. usmdly cte,; later ctb', rarely i[ir, e.g. c[er.ccr[rr
' interl,rets,' etiv.]én ' I reeoguised' : l,efore iufixed ],r, ms.
C. with accusative, cicr, iter, ctb', later et«r,
D. see+ Sg: with imm, i.»a t-etor, immcet.r 'in
turn.'
227a. meanins ot etnr.
(.) between, c.g. etev Di. oet«. d.i.e "hctween
an,I man.' de«h.v etev c, oTm temdi corlm talmamlt
' diflwence 1,etween hcavculy b.dies and earthly 1,odies.'
(b) amont, e.g. ,;edn elev b,tttllt« 'unity
hors,' cer taith 'among iay-fo]k.'
(c) bot C..ml), e.g. cicr ,,[r d,,ir, c'ter m.9 3 «omdid
' 1,oth frce and tmfr«e, both serrant and
(d) at ail..mol d bimmi. .lift d ctir "as if we were
hot worth anything a ail."
228. flad 'in l,rc.sence t,f,' ( x ! tM-) cf. Eu. t«itme.,'..
C. [iad', with dative, e.g..[ctd ,'hd,'h 'in the 1,rêsence
of ail," fhtd d,»fidb 'l»cfore men' : later with accuative e.g_
jïctd .[t 'l»cfove kings."
D. with suttixed pro,s, pl. 2 .ïadib. 3
229. fo
A. Jb',./¢'. belote consonants, e.g. )b-«hvai,'c "reward,"
fit-(lnmai "deep': in inlaut after «,d, d-b-l,m (b=)
+d:l;,-I,m "ready.'
Before vowels fi»+o >fil, flta ; fo+rt >.1; : fo+i
e> .lb/, ff;e; e.g'.
.[bimlel < .lb-imt-,
remains ],efore a v.wcl, e.g'.
mare- ' su]@gatiou."
O in/to the disal,l,caranec of lcnitcd f in I,rototon. forms
iike .t«,irc, "immol,yi (deuteroton. d,,.fitoirc, im'2bbgi)
sometimcs al,l,ears atmlogieally in deuteron, forms, e.«
do-d'2bgnd instead of md.to9,,l ' who ued to swear it,
dc2/,i[ instead of do.t,it ' falis.'
119
B. let..fit : e.g. fo.daim ' suflrs,' f,,]èra ' prel,ares,"
jb.etcetnim 'succiuo' ; 1,efore a vowel sometimes as in A,.
e.g..I?cab for .tb.dcab.
C..lb', fit" with dative and a«eusative, e.g. (with da.
.lo-cketor at once, Jo pheccetd uuder sm, (with
aee.) .Ib .machtu ' under eommauds.' With the ar. Jbn,
Jhn, A. n. ta, A. 1,1. Jbnm.
D. see § 90.
229a. meanin¢s of l'o.
(re) with aec. motion towards, or into, e.g. re teckt fa
batk[s ' I»ef«we ('mning tmder I»ptism,' intl téte jb recht n-
imdibe ' he who g,)es tre,let the law of circumeision.'
(b) with dat. 'under," e.g.Jb et cko.saib ' tmder his feet,"
Jb detd 'at last': for use with uumerals v. 82.
230. l'or <*»ci»er, (;k. ,r.p, Lat. s»«per.
A..fb»" (fro') before both vowels aud consonants, in later
glosses with lenitiou as in Jbr-ckem« 'end.'
B. Jbr, fitr, fit»', e.g. Jbr.tdt, fitr'cuimsiti, fitr.aitk-
minter.
C. jbr (or) with dative nd aeeus«tiva : D. v. 90.
The regular develol,lllell uper> ter is found in Gaulish
Uer-cingetorix, but lu Welsh and Breton gof and Irish
fJ»" the vowel has ehanged to o under the influence of go-,fo.
meanings of for
230a. XVith aecusative.
(et) beyond, e.g. nach-a-telcM fttirib 'do not let them
(go) past you.'
(b) upon (wih sense of dece»ding upon), usually with
do.biur, e.g. do.beir d[ail brt ' infliets pmlishment upon
thee,' similarly do.beir maldackti», dimi«cim, breitk,
lbr
120
(c) With verbs of motiou .r implying motion to fidicate
terminus, e.g. tecbt imm," c,n'p j;,»" wm "to go in out
body t heaveu,' uI .«». cuoirl lmrebe d,.coid " hot on a
diucesau visitatiuc has he go,e': similarly point of attack,
e.g. /eb,hl i .¢rol ./br ctréli "«,e sçhool will attack
another."
231. frith <*£«.'t, Lat. verlere, «er.us, Eng. -war, l.,.
A..I)'ith (ff'M) lwfl,re xox els, e.g..l)'ith«»r,',m ' ofluce,'
.l'id-,irced 3rd sg. irai,. : with a iw«l,osition heg'iuning with
a vowel it c¢ales«es in the form ,fffi'e.s.-, c.g..I'e.s.e«iu < .l)'ith-
«td-ce.qiu. Belote eonsonants, the fimd deutal assimilates
to the eonsouau ot thc anlaut, e.g.fi'ecre (ç = ) < fi'ith-
ab'e ' auswcr,' fi'ec»d, irc < fi'ith-cau-der« ' l,resent' :
a later stage.l)'ith remains mchaued hefore consouants
and causes lenition, e.g..l)'itb-cbathu9ud ' op-pugnatio.'
B. fri., ./)'i.% e.g..t)'is-aççot 'they hope,' fri..9air
' allSWel's.'
C. ri'{', (somctimes ri=ff'i) with aeeusative, e.g.
D. see § 89.
231a. meanings of frith
(.) to(vards), e.g. do-c«t««r .l'«i t,l« i beth« 'they a'e
gonc to the desircs of the worhl," fi'i ddicsin m««ith 'to-
wards seeing good."
(b) for (pmT»o.e), e.gç fri rmutach -ecol..o 'for the
edification of the Church," fi'i biathtd a Jbrritl, ide 'for
the SUl,pOrt of thc teachers.'
121
(,') attitude to,vards, e.g. bad J',,irr«ch ,'d«h fri alaile
'let every o.e I,e g'e.tle t,wards the other,' t «6re d«ib
.ri'lb-si ' it is l,eace t, them towards you.'
(d) against, e.g. »ri a«.,e tuidechl fi'i h,il I)é ' it is
easy to g» agai.st the will of (o(],' btl t',,ttr»ttt.w do.
9»dlber fi'iu-sm 'the si. that, is eommitted agains them.'
(e) texl,ress similaritydissimilarity,twcontrariety,
e.g. c«,ml./)'i cc¢hir 'like unto a I,east.' ct,[tlrmle fi'i
" t,l»l,OSed to I t«l,' samaltir .]li laithe ' i COml,al"ed
day,' a dechttr.l)'i sactrht .[ëtarlù'«e 'his diflk.rewe fr«,m
the l»riesls of the ohl law."
(j') along vith, e.g. «, r«,.r¢lmlom ¢t «rpc fi'i
'that we lmty shal'e his heritage ilh Christ,'
" ,wks toethcr with. helps."
() with='frt,m', sctrtthl.l)'i 'parts with," af ,tt«h-it-
ritd«trpillwr .[)'ll'l .[)'Vl'tll 'lest thou lw east away from
thc righl couscss.'
(b) to, witl verbs t,f ,ddre.ssitg. tt«[th'lff, ffl'rt'nff, hk'tet-
l'lty, e.g. tX .ri'lu a-bcr«tr 'it is to them is said,'
be»'lh«tr flumen fl'is. ' tiret jhtmcn is added toit,"
.[).is« ro.airplhtt 'as i is to him that they have 1,eeu
trusted,' Cl.s-et j)'isil Drecepl 'le them listen to the
preachmg.
(i) with reterence to, e.g. m'./)-tX, ru.«bdt 'it was
with reference toit tha it was sung,' sttin J)'i cttlh sttin J)'i
s«or ' diflbren for I,ttle, diflçren$ f,w unyoking.'
(j) at, in, e.g. fii dei 'in the day rime." ,t[ bethe fi'i
tt acre 'ye should no he COml,[aining of i (lit. 'at its
eoml,laini.g),' .fi'i debuid ' ai trife."
122
The endiug in [«tf-mi is l,rol»al»ly aftcr the analogy of
verni.
(2. [or ' with dative e.g. [cr wdli,j:¢d, htr
D. see § 88.
282a. meanlngs of far.
(a) after (of tiret), e.g. irtr ve..éir,jtt 'after rcsurrec-
tion,' [rtr m-br«ithiu.q 'after haptism.'
(b) along, e.g. int tiste it, r.it «mim 'the water
along thc saud.'
(c) accordin to, e.g. farsi, dhud 'according to the
law,'/or «'olitn 'according to the flesh."
2. imm. imb:%&hi, ;k. dp.6;, Lat. amb-.
A. the ohler form imb is frequently retained hefore
v.wels, ./ r, e.g. imb-echt,'ach 'exteriov,' imb-rddud 'medi-
tatiott,' imbide<imb-fi.the 'hedged in:' imb+., beeoms
imp, e.g. imi»td<imb-.oud 'turnitg': befove eonsonant
ira(m)', e.g. im-chdinti ' mutual eomplaints,' im-thrgnugm!
eonfirmng.
B. ira(m), rel. imme, ira»m, e.g. im.rddi 'meditates,'
ira.soi 'tre'us,' imme.rddi or imm,.rddi 'who meditates.'
C ira(m)' with accusafive e.g. ira chemt a .qacardd
'avound the head of the l,riests."
D. see 89.
233a. meanin's of imm.
(««) round about, c.g. cri.s.« J''ie immib 'a girdle of
truth around you," ira «hem "around the head.'
(b) concerning, c.g. ira (lelhidn«o 'eoncevninganxietics'
,t-,..bit«v i,t cho.mtdiu« ira! fir,lni..i 'what I sy con-
cerfing the likeness of the testimony.'
(c) for (with verl,s of
mit bidbethid '(we gvoau)
geis.s cdçh imm-¢t-eh,molmd 'when thou heeechet every-
one for its fulfilment.
234. In, lnd < " et, ed, e»,d, Gk, 1, 1'1, l,at. b,, i]ldl¢-.
A Bcfore vowcls usually iml., e.g. iml-avbe 'exlmlsion," i»,d-o«bSl ' glory,' l,ut also lu, e.g. do'i»-6-1a ' collects.'
Before cousonants e», and i»t" (i»d'), e.g. e»t»e 'cog-
nitiou': before « and t e» becomes tç e.g. «,re.d-ter <Sco-
e»t-tdt 'conuivcs at.': d,».éci <Sdo-e»-ci 'looks at'; thcn is
assimilated to l, v, «, e.g. ellacb <:*e»da('h "mtit, n.' eb'red
(G. of eb'r 'warrior who fights from :r chariot ") <
de..id <Sd-e»-id 'lins sat down': beforc « the e is short
evmaiy <e»-«'om-,my-, lwol»al»ly aftcr thc au«dogy
colupounds with thc form i», which la;tre short i like
tim'bosc < to-in«'bos(" (Thm'n.). thc fol'nls [" <ii,
irai' <i»de can only l»e (listinguishcd l»cforc s, iml+.¢
],ecoming i»t, e.g. iMamail or i»t.amail <si»,d-.¢amail
'imitation, but insddt)dtbe <i»d-.ddtothe: ],clore r thc
usual form is iml-, e.g. b,d-r(,d ' invasion.' hcft,re thc othcr
cOIISOIlants l,oth ftn'm al,pear as i»-, c.g. infft' (ff=T)
<ini-ffe»a (()gham) 'daughter,' but in-cho««. 'lueallillg '
may stand for either simç«'h,,.c or si»,de-ch(,.'('.
B. i», e.g. iwgvei»o ' l,ersecutes ' i»«llmg ' 1 (hvde" " '
its place is fre, luently takeu l_,y ad or as, c.7. ad.gvein»,
as.dl,,i»,g : this is l,artly due to thc fact that l»cfore infixcd
ll'onoulls the fovm of ad, iu and t,.us are alike, aml l,artly
l)ccausc coml,otmds with the diflbrcnt l)rel,ositious had a
very S[ulilar nleaning (Thurn.).
C. i' with dat. and act. c g. i n«b'iti, t'lu thc recel,tion,'
i mbdlre 'into a langtmge,' with gcminati«m ille.'t,tr 'in a
vessel,' lu»dru 'in heavcu,' hcnce l»cl'haps latcr io,- als
bcfore vowels, e.g. i»,»aim.siv 'in the timc.'
D. sec 90.
234a. meaninKs ot in.
Vith dat. in (of place), e.g. iditm 'lu nie,' 'c(t('h Itcç
'i cx-cry l,lace': (of rime) is.i»d aim.iv si» 'at that tinle,'
bi ca«h Ido ' cvcrv (la)r'; with accusative into, e.g. i cride
'into the heart."
ix ' tlndCl'" v.
235. la < «le.s < :»let.s'.
The ohlest form is le, whieh heeomes proelitie la ; Thurn.
dru.ix es it ff'oto leth 'side.'
C. la « with weusatire e.g. lamua«cu 'with sons.'
D. see ç
235a. meanings of
(a) possession, e.g. it lib uili 'they are ail yours,' if le.
i**«l mvil '1 lis are the angeis."
(b) in the opinion of, e.g. u[ .uebul lcmm "I do no
e.nsider it, a shmne," *) «I«muiu lim 'we deem ig more
certain': also to, e.g. , ld h'mm 'it is elem" to me.'
I«) among (Lat. almd), e.g. la U'dcu 'among the
Greel;s,' la a,wloru 'apnd anetores.'
(d) agent, e.. doff6nt, r lciss 'will he wrought hy him,'
«ou'dt,«ht I« Duaid 'which was bnilg by lhvid."
(e) along ith, e.g. 1»roiud les« bi taiff 'eaging with
him in a house,' I, mmarb« 'along with the dead.'
(f) ethical dative, e.g. dette let (»rinti« 'look thon
the Coi.inthians.'
236. d, a, Lat.
Two distinct l,reposiLions have 1,eeome eonfused: (a)
:od, Cud eoI'resl,omling go bkr. ud, Eng. out, and (b)
eorresponding to Lat. ou- in (««ç/èra : the form ««d< o +
od, round belote the 3rd pers. of the l,rommns aud in later
newly formed eompounds, is an admixtm'e of both forms
(Thm'n. who now suggests uks or :uds as ground form).
A. Belote eOllSOlltlltS «, tt, e.g. «,pari = obbad < Xod-bad
'refusal" u«cu<'nd-fl*« 'ehoiee' («;cbdl has d from the
influence of t6cbdl), ,d.otmir < » ad-od-beir "sacrifices,' con.
«taiug <:.d-dcdn 'l,uihls': fo, fo, to, +g>¢g, 'd, td
(tua), e.g. ¢c'e<fo-od-e, ire 'proehunation,' q'dtacht
%'o-od-dcwht : in t«a.sdcud, t«a«h«cud there is a confusion
of two 1,rel,tsitions, riz. to-oa-léic- and to-ess-léie (cf.
pret. as'oilc < « e.s-od-léic-î, t6cbdl < to-od-eabdl 'raising';
Thurn. now takes oilc as l'{»or : a.* being for proelitie u.,-s (u/,'. or
and t «u.,.ul«ml = to-u.*s-olc-.
125
iii two old COml.»uuds, lopt.<«to-vd-ber- . 'weli' aud tvs-
oelC«('ll ( lo-vd-M«tg- ' " l
])egll,lllllg thc to is rcduccd to t-alld
uo lcl,gthcning t:tkcs place: hefore l, " it appcars as d,
()wing to a confusion with lcnitcd ./, i ¢lc,tel'.tol. fOl'lUS
j" al)pear almlogical]y rcstot'ed ft'om l»r(»tot(nt, forms, e.g.
iwot)ton..lt«i.'im<to-«d-scm-, dcutcroton, d(,.Jbi«im iu-
stead of
lit lCW COml,Otm(ls it aPl,ears as dnd, e.g. «td-fi)tlh'btbe
(.f=.f) 're-nelatus,' ht(ttt«tsailcth«te<i«t«l-t- 'ahsolutus';
in oue word a - riz. hta-béht 'Ol,Cn-moutbcd.'
B. examples llliCel't«ill.
G. tT, kt" with dative, e.g. 6 th(,ss«cb "from thc hcgin-
ing," hi«t ibitd 'from thc al)uld«mce.'
D. sec ç 88.
236a. meanings ot 6.
(et) separation trom. e.g. d .oil..i cta»'«»,i l)t; 'away
f'onl the light of tbe knowledgc of Go(l," ty htide
Ab'ttçh(t "a slave who went ri'oto Ab'ahaln.'
(b) origin or material, e.g. is i«tdib C»I..t 'Christ is
(Sl,rung) from them." 6 ilb«tllaib 'of many ruerai)ets.'
(c) agent, e.g. no.oi'(.tbe d p,pd 'used to ])c killed
by thc i»COldC, ' jbrc«tt," bd s,««trdd 'are taught by a
priest.'
(d) instrument, e.g. ht« sMib 'by IlletllS of t}lC eycs,"
d bélib 'with thc iil,s,' ht(« bds 'hy the dcath.'
(e) çause, e.g. d dc..e'ct" 5.«tlh«t'di 'fl'om 1)r(,thcrly
love,' ho «tmiri 'from mbelicf.'
(f) in, e.g. Itdhle d dcosc 'a Jew in q,l,Carancc,' d
bE.sttib "in customs.'
(g) [or, trom (of time), e.g. b«; aim«b" 'for a rime,' d
Ad(m ' fl'onl the time of Adam.'
(h) partitive (Olll)" with sutxed pl'OIIOllllS), e.g. ccb
i«tib-.' 'Ole of you,' cdcb ««tl-i 'each OllC of s.'
126
237. oc < aggu- ' af.'
A longer form oçu is round proclitic belote verbal forms.
A. & B. on]y in the verb o«u.ben ' touches ' in whieh forms
of the subst, verb are confused with forms of benaid, e.g. fut.
3rd pl. oct.bi(tt, pass. sg'. ocu.bether, perf. oc«t.ro-bae, pres.
pass. 3rd pl. octt.bendar, l,rototon. .oçnan«tt«o', verbal
noun ot.nHti(l, (. ocnttide; it the l«'ototon, forms the b
of the foot is changed to m (=) 1,rohably ut«lev the
fluencc of the I,rep. coin in forms like .ecmaing (Thuru.).
C. oc. otc (uc, ucc, ,«, iv) with dative, e.g. oc lubie.te 'at
the creation,' tc soi l»Stric "at Patrick's white-thorn,
soi. oc tintmith ' skilled at trausl:ttiug,' trén oc te«mallad
' mighty at gathering' ; with a verbal uoun and the sui)st.
verb to forma «ontiuuous tense, present or past, e.g. bbtu-
set oc irbdig'] ara wont to be glorying,' ilr ocprecept
.sosc«qi.tl5 'it is prc«tching thc Gospcl that I ara,' ce-rml.
bol oec a thindn.«td-som ' though he was dclivering Him
.up."
D. see
238. os < ks, ' above.'
C. ds, 6,. with dative, later leuitiug e.g. tctstm 'above
me,' h«as r¢n ' al»ove the sun,' hua., lil'ib ' over letters '
mctaphorically 6.,' çeçh anmimm ' above every naine.'
D. see 88.
239. reine, re < prisami, cf. Lat.
< prsmo.s (Thuru.) ' i,efore."
A. 'em', e.g. rem-.uidiytd 'preposition,'
t 1 WC(sSiOll.
B. 'emi., tel. reine-e.g, remi.stMiddi.s 'they used o
place it before,' 'emi.taat 'lwaesuut, ' tel. reme.n-Hiçsed
gl. on prne-oplftre.
C. 'e" (ri), later .ht ', with dative: e.g. re -oivi[e
gr«ffd ' before receiving orders," ri [e«ht (i.e. decht) 'before
going,' re mbds ' before death.'
D. see 8.
127
240. o
(For fo as verbal l.,article v. §§ 1)3-105).
A. fo',
«,«o, e.g. ro-mdr (m = g) ' too great,' ro-5h«ch 'too fond
of drilddug,' hef. verls -ro-O (for .»'o-Mg) "l'eaehes.' Bef.re
vowe]s the o is dl'Ol,led, e.g. -r-le 'reaehes,' hut is l'e-
taiued in the ro-suhj, of dem-, e.g..derohm«. In the
pret. of do.gn[ and do.sh«i, di it 1,eeomes ri under the
il,flUCllee of the voealization of t]le lwototolL nal'r, forms, e.g.
do.rigéni after .dtgd, i, do.rtlti.et after dilti.s.et : hef, l'e the
verb léi«id it heeomes re, e.g. .reil«ed (deuteroton.
ro.létYed).
Betweeu l'etail,c(1 cons,nm,ts iu thc syllablc immediatcly
after the accent it beeomes -af from )', e.g.
< t-ind-'-.«an < to-imt-ro-s«an.
B, 'o 'tt, e.g. ro.saiff 'veaehes to.' Prototon. fovmsare
sometimes round instead of deuteroton, e.g. ri«eu, 'ucad
hesides ro.h'«u, ro.uead.
C. D. hot fould.
241. sech, Lat.
The proclitic forms .echmo-, sc«hmi-are after the
analogy of iarmtt-, iarmi-, &c.
A. and B., ouly with verbs of motion : e.g. se«hmo.ella
' passes by' (with 6 ' is wauting '), prototon...+e«hmalla.
C. with accusative, e.g. ech cdch 'leyond every one.'
D. see § 89.
241a, meanings of sech.
(a) beyond, e.g. s'ech mo chomSe.-.a 'heyoud my
coevals,' sech in n-aires.if '|)eyolt(1 the time.'
(b) rather than. e.g. t, it leu pre«ept dom«a .eccu
'they are jealou. that I preach rather thau they.'
(c) contrary to, e.g..ech com««i-rli D,," "coutrary to the
counsel of Goal."
242. tar, dar< :ta'e«, Skr. lirSh.
A. tairm'- (tarin'-), e.g. tairm-thecht 't«'ans,rcssion,'
tairm-ehosal ' l)revavicatio ' ; lolg'cr fornl in tairme.cc
'hildranee.'
B. tarmi, e.g. tarmi.herar 'is rransferred,' buç it is
usually reldaeed by tremi (v. § 244), e.g. tremi.berar.
C. tar, dar, with aeeusative, e.g. tar er[ch 'over the
territory.'
D. see§ 89. With the suflixed prons, of the 3rd pers.
tair.e, tairsit le original final s realq,êars.
242a. meaninKs of tar.
(a) across, over, e.g. tar cr&'h, tav ro.c'over the
eye.'
(b) by (in swearing), e.g. tar Ioib 'by Julfiter,'
d'ctitig tarai.' .fade.i. ' tle sware by Himself.'
243. to, do ' to.'
(Fvom the demonstvative sten, to- (Thurn.D.
A. to', tu', e.g. to-thaim ' fall,' to-chmarc 'wooing' ;
when the following syllable eontais a, also ta-, e.g. tabair,
tarat, < do.beir, do.rat : in .terffa, "tir9a the vowel
change is due to the influence of the deuteroton, fovms
do.reffa, do.riffa ; in teilcind, teh'ht, &e., from do.l(ici the
change is lwol)al»ly duc to confusion with au old com!,ound
to-et-léh'- (Thm'n.). ri in .tLbdra 'will givc" is explained
as due to thc amdogy of the vedupl, fut. (Thurn.) or of
diffdn (BevgJn). Belote vowels t-, c.g. t-h" 'cornes,' and
hefore other lweps, with vocalic anlaut, e.g..tord-, .t-e..-,
t-imm- ; l»ut with od it llSll;tlly appears as 15 (ttla) :
toz)'- > tS-, t6r, e.g. tS-be (to-fi»be-), rob'mach (to4br-
mff-) do only appears lu latcr artificial coml»om(ls , c.g.
dobriathar ' ad«'crl).' do-a«aldma«h 'alq)cllativus.'
1:29
B. (For archic t«, to, v. Iutrod.)
From Wh. onwards do, d«, e.g. do.te[t 'falls, d«.tdt
'cornes': before vowels sometimes A as well as B, e.g. recel-
bat beside do.adbat 'shows.'
C. do', dt', with dative, e.g. do chath 'to battlc,' do
thaidbsit 'to show.'
D. see § 88.
243a, Meanings of to, do.
(a) aire: e.g. d« démtm mec[rit 'to doing good,' de)
thabirt d[ghte 'with a view to iuflieting i,unishmcnt.'
(b) agent: a .ft,l«t»g dom-.«t 'thcir sufferiug to me= I
had to surfer thcm,' airit[tt col»o dfi Cltr[.t 'the taking of
ficsh hy Christ,' [ dé»tri dftib-.«i 'it should hot 1)c done
by you.'
(c) state: e.g. de Ittdeib do Bar»tctip 'Barnabas was of
Jewish origin,' d samlaid sd»t d'm-»i 'it is hot so with us.'
243. b. tri, tre < *trê_iott (Thurn.).
(The forlll tremi, trimi, after analogy of 'emi.)
A. trem'-, e.g. trem-feidligtd (f=j') 'permanence,' trem-
ctm«ti»'esach 'perfidus.'
B. tre»,i-, trimi, tel. treme, examl)les rare, e.g. trimi
berar, treme.tlta[t 'which pcnetrates': in tr[..ffat«t[m
b,re through' it follows the amdogy of j)'i, fri..
C. tri', tre', with accus«tive, e.g. tri cltret[m 'throug'h
faith, tri thabairt 'through giving'; with the article
tri.»m, &c. ; with the rel. particle
D. see § 89.
2433. /Vleanings of tri.
(a) through : e.g. tri .c«ath 'per speculum.' tri t]temel
through darkness.'
(b) instrument : e.g. tri bc«t]ti. 'by means of haptism,'
beo i,d a»im t.ri .od[»t 'the soul is therel)y alive," tri
t]m'ad mo p»'ecepte 'by the fruit of my teachiug'.'
i
130
(c) cause: tre t]ah'mt]wct recto 'by reason of trans-
.ression of the Law,' is marb h corp tri.na senpecthu
'the body is dead because of the old sins.'
244. (s)amal 'like, as,' cf. Lat. similis.
The form amal (proclitic with loss of initial s, v. § 24) is
in origiu an adverhial dative of samail 'similitude' (Thurn.).
It is fimluded among the prepositions because it takes the
accusative and suflixed pronouus.
C. amal', e.g. amal chlanda 'as children,' amal cho-
ch«ll 'like a covering.'
D. accented with s-, see § 89.
245. Examples of compounds
prepositions.
la i»'bi»" < «atth = tooair= beir
6c re < «atr= fo - od - ga i»'e
com (tcomol ( : o-d-o- l-
coin lb itritl'lt8 ( CO = to=a]r=o= reth-
dorécacha < * di-ro-en=c-
eta rtela roc r < «etar= to =etar= cur
fristinfet < «Yrtth to- ind-fet
imtimcél fctm < * tmb= to= im b=c-
intinscamta < «ind=to-tnd=scamt-
tia rmdrach t toiarmo=Io r-
xvith several
brlngs " '
agun.
COIl]lllalld.
conjunction.'
incursion.'
has seen.'
intercession.'
blows " '
agallSt.
'we shall surroum-l.'
begins.'
following.'
246. Nominal Prepositions (with genitive of noun
and possessive pronoul).
i narrad with.' t n=degatd (dgcud) after.
ar bdlaib 'before.' ddg (d'féch) ' on account
fo bith (fit blthin) ' because of.'
of.' dot:hum'" ' to.'
ar chenn ' to meet.' do éis ' (remaining) behind.'
tar cenn ' instead of.' tar ési ' after, in place of.'
ar chiunn 'belote, await- i n-ellug (elhwh) 'united
iug.' with.'
di chiunn 'away.' a persin 'in the person of.
ar chuit 'as regards, as fo.' as to.'
for ctilu ' back, backward.' a rainn ' as regards.'
i n.dead (diad) 'after.' dl rziith 'in place of.'
IX.--THE CONJUNCTIONS.
247. Copulative.
(a) acus' ocus" (octis), later is : ' and' ; in origin connee-
ted with the adj. acuÆ, oct., ' near' : etir--ocus = ' bothm
"tlld. '
(b) emith--emith, or emid---emid : (W. hetgt, heJgd
0.H.G. «cornet), uscd to translate the Ltt. tam--qt«am;
e.g. emid du.scdula, emid ara.n-ggea: it is derived from
x/.em and eognate with Gk. ta nd Lat. semel, simd;
cf. Lat. use of simtl--simul, e.g. simd spernebat, simd
mettebant.
(c) sceo (W. heibio from . seq 'to follow') 'and,'a
l,oetic word common in "'rhetorics."
248. Disjunctive.
(a) n6", o , m: : 'or,' e.g, dd 7»'ecept6ir o t]rii : o
"*»to-te <*ne-çte (cf. I,at. ece) originlly meant ' or hot.'
(b) robo, rodbo 'either, or';iu origin a potential fo-
Subi. (Thurn.), the d in rodbo heing probably an infixed
pFOllOUll.
(c) a, ha or v. § 101.
249. Temporal.
(t) in tain, in ta», (lit.'at the time'): 'when' e.g. in
tain mb[. "when it is,' in tan dt.rtirngert Dia'when
God promised. æ
(b) nach tan : ' whenever,' e.g. ach tan ro.n-ecat a les
'whenever they need it.'
(c) dia': 'when' (with the narr. pret.) e.g. dia.htid
Dauid for longais 'when Dvid wen into exile.'
(d) a": neg. a»ma, with ro>arru-, ara'u-; e.g. an-o--
derbid 'when you prove,' ara-bas cete 'when i is sung,'
ana-taibrem 'when we give not,' ar«u.ces'tai9ser 'when
hou disputeds.'
(e) la=se (lit. 'with this'): 'when,' e.g. lasse ad-n-ellhtb
' when I shall visi'; also ' whereas,' e.g. lase foruillecta
132
be6il in chalich di »fil co.¢.¢e oall ' whereas hitherto the
lips of the chalice bave beên smeared with honey.'
(f) éin, éine (acc. and gen. of ckm): 'so long as,
whilst,' e.g. céin bas béo b Jë" 'so long as the man (bus-
baud) lires,' cébw no.soi]è-Mt 'so long as thou tul'nest.'
(g) ' and ua" (= d + et"): 'since,' with perf. ' after,' e.g,
ho lnid Adam ta" réb" 'since Adam tz:ausgressed the will
(of God)', htrt.g-erbb'mi.s, bhtth gl. ozz ex illo tempore quo
degel)mms,' d ad.cuaid 'aftcr he has declared,' (ad.ctaM
= l)crf, of ad.f C) : possil)ly 5 with the copula is contained
in os m(ç &c., 'I. as for me, &c.,' 3rd pl. ot é, fl'on d-is
d-it é (Thurm).
(h) iarsindi: 'after,' e.g.
'aftcr thcy were worthy of death,' [ar,bdl ha mane noch
riim ' after it was mae "early" before.'
(i) resiu, risiu (lit. 'l»efore this'): 'belote' with 'o-sul)j..
e.g. 'esht rL«-sa 'l)efore I corne,' 'i.ult 'o.c[oamm««r
' before we hear.'
(j) o" (= co + et »') : neg. coznd, cooz5ch, ' uutil': e.g.
con.tSffcc lex 'until the law came,' co-t[ in fi''-brithem
(ri= d[)'uutil the truc judge corne': after negative sen-
tences, with -o-subj., e.g. co.r'uc-sa do chen-su (co.r'tc
cog-'o-uc) ' uutil I bring thy bead.'
250. Final.
(a) ara" (=ar+a): neg. a'n6, a'naco. 'in order
that': e.g. ara.-dernaid an-do.gHam i a'a.dernaid
a-««l demm-ff ' that ye may do what we do, and that
ye may uot do what we do hot'; also as explicative, e.g.
asbered J»'i« ara.géti. degimu 'he used to tell them
to do good deeds.'
(b) co': 'in order that,' e.g. co eterce'ta'that he mav
interpret'; neg. coff eta'scartha. 'that it be hot Sel)arated'
(c) co": ' in order that,' e.g. co.-den« deg»[m ' that he
do ood deeds: neg. " " '
comtach.modect zech lest anv one
should boast': also explicative, e.g.a.be'at com.bad"thev
say that it would be.'
133
(d) abamin (a"ameinn), with pret. subj. without fo:
' would that,' e.g. abamin fo.r.n-ahlmilte'wouhl tllat thou
wouldest cdl to mind':
The origan of tlle forms is ol)scllrc: [ suggest that abamin
(afameimt) as an eclamatory pbrase=d bad amht, i.e.
the exclam«ttiou d '() ' fouud only with tbe vocative case of
nOOllS (exccl,t in the Latinism a tht.s.vn), bad or lad the
3rd sg. citllcr of thc inl],ertive or of tbe prct. subi.
of the copula, and amant, ameht, ameit-.«e 'thus, so';
the l,hr«tse mcauiug lit. 'O tiret it were soi' the form
afi«mem«d (a[]hmem«d) uscd with a past tCllSe
addition mmtllcr fovm of the COl,Ubt -ad = hl (cf. mad) and
moins lit. 'O that it were so it ha(l bce,1 ]' For the reduc-
tiou jhd amin>fi«min cf..fodc.sin>jdit : the fOl'laiS with
ffshow that tbc.fwas lm[Cllited, and the form afomet.a
(Meyer ('ontril)b.)=d lad amet-se. For a very similar
phl'se with the saine UlCning cf. Welsh 0 ta bai 0
byddai 0 ta bua.s'ai (past) ; cf. also oli.samcin 252, 257.
dno, dono, arcbaic dadt, d«mcu : 'theu,' co,'respondiug
in use to Lat. ergo, igitt,r; e.g. cicr dono ' who then,'
ceeh fit dota ' it as llOt every grass thCll.'
didiu < di .«Miu : ' then, accordingly, e.g.i.s, loto"
dMi« creitem bwholnictho ' bclief in the incarnation, then,
as sufficient for us.'
trd : "tben, therefore,' e.g. a»t[.iu trd i.s écen 'this, then,
as necessary,'/s folb,s, a sin trd'it as evident from this
then.'
251. Conditiona.
m, md, usually leuitiug, neg. mad : 'if, if hot': with
the and. when the condition as 1)l'esent or past e.g. ma
cbomaldt a tgrdd 'if they fulfil their ovders,' ma ru-d-
chois.cset « .mmuhttir 'if they bave corrected their house-
hold': with thc subi. if future, e.g. tati ît'M(ty 'unless I
(shall) lweach,' .marri ab'gara rect'unless the law (shall)
Iorbid'; with the pret. subi. if the condition be inaginary
or doubtful, e.g. matis tni«si ' if they had been elect (but
they were llOt).'
di,": 'if,' with subi., e.g.
chimme 'if we fulfil what we 1,reach,' tilot« in bend«t«had
dict.m»mld«tchae ' hlessing is hot enough il thou cm'se.'
,«lrt (ctct): 'l,rovidcd that,' with 'o- subj., e.g.
«t..robnrth«tr it m['lrovidcd the month be nlentioned,'
ttchl ro)»o i ltil l)ée 'l,rovided it be in God's will': neg.
with sul,j, without fo-, e.g. «tct tt bed t«tll ctd ' provided
there were no 1,ride therei,,' «tct «trbarctt bitth ina
ttari 'l,rovided they do hot partake of the food.'
252. Cusal.
6re, hdrc, htnre '. sg. ,ff (h)t,tr=hrt, originally
temporal iike Eng. 'since' : ' because,' e.g. httt«e ro«reit.e
'l,eeause hey have belicved,' h,;re no-n-dob-mol,2r-.a
'l,ee«utse [ ,raise you.'
fo bitlr: 'because,' e.g. ri, b[th do--9n[«tt cercol
' because they make a cirele,' Jb b[lh i« ephcborl»dtte
'tha is because i is ineorl,oreai.'
dég : ' 1,ec;mse,' e.g. d(,j r,2-m-bt écid«tircc ' because he
was al,sent,' th;3 ro-b,;i in ,'Diltr dib le.o.s. 'because the
Holy Sl,irig was with him.'
ol: 'because,' only in the l,hrasc ol i. ttmeb 'l,ecause
ig is so.'
ar, air: 'for, because,' L«t. ctm, e.g. ter is di lt.s
do.,j[tber ' for it is fronl an herb i is nmde,' airi ' on that
,CCOtlllt.'
sec/ : ' yet, althottgh" (originally ' besi(les that'), e.g..'ech
[s 6e-s'l)irtl fi,t.d«'di'yet it is one sl)irit distributes it,'
sech ha birbthe a ires. .'idi ' although his faith was perfec,'
sech ha htttislitt bt[ for.cho:air'although he who orders
were superior': in 5Il..e«h i, .ech it are also used in the
exl,lanaory sense of 'tha is, i.e.' with or withou a follow-
ing a6t or d»t, e.g. s'ech is. ilnigfe .,; 'i.e. Thou wil
multiply,' secb i. me.¢caiglder 6n. 'i.e. Thou wilt intoxicate,'
sech it gbnoi sdn 'i.e. he deeds,' sech i. mo cboi. "i.e.
my foot': for sech [ v. § 101.
135
253. Adversative.
cammalb, cammoiph, cammaif (c««nmi Wh. 3 d ),
<camm-oOh lit. ' false apl,earauce' (Thurn.): ' still, not-
withstanding': e.g. in »andid cammaib atnid.i 'it is thus,
however, that ye are,' d-a-géna camm«tib 'he will do it,
however,' cam«th thechtait m'nmnidi ' nevertheless, they
have uomilmtives,' Ng. 209 b 3a, here camaip] causes
]enition.
lmmurgu < im-ro-geu ' a gl'cat falsehood ' '] (suggested
by Thurn.), cf. Mid. l. immair-bré«, and l,at. he««-d which
is eoguatc, origilmlly theu a stroug eoutradictory: used
like Lat. «tttcm : e.g. in beo id tnim, in m«trb in corp
immrg« 'the soul is «dire, but the body is dead," ni
lh««i no .»enme immm'g« " but my mind doe hot under-
stand it'; along with «o»u«)h, e.g. rocrthadsemmat
c«»mOd imm«rg« 6en ch«b'act«r 'we have formed uever-
theless one eharaeter': with noch, e.g. noch i»nmm.g« ni
rol.at ' still notwithstandiug they did hot east away.'
nocD : 'but, yet,' used like Lat. lamen, attomen : e.g.
anml no.bed, noch ni rail 'as if it were, yet it is hot';
with ém, «bn, e.g. noch ,m ara 1.srahéhle 'although indeed
I ara an Israelite', no«h cire fo«lcHicenél 'but still it distiu-
guishes geuder '; noch :s. also in Ml. = 'that is," cf..ech £q.
ém, m: 'indeed however,' e.g. ricc«b-.«« éta 'I will
corne however,' do.gtian 6n 'we iudeed make.'
cDt (¢«c/): 'but, excel,t that'; e.g. ni delb adrorsot,
a«t commMi«. delbe 'it is hot an image that they have
adored, but it is the likeuess of an image,' ro.lggsat c<«ndin
fetarlaici oc. n«fiodn£.s'i anml rwn-det-le:g.am-ni, acht
ro-n-d««-.«Hb,set-son 'they bave read the Canou of the Old
Testament aud of the New Testament as we have read
it, exeel.t tha they have perverted it': with an ex-
tension of the latter meaniug e.g. ni redot-som acht
bréi« 'they speak only lies': with n««mm, e.g. ««cht
comp«trit ne,t««ir namnui 'but the neuter comprative
only,' acht namm« (gl. on ni.*i forte) 'save only.'
136
inge, except ; e.g. in tan ba. ram bt ,qillab except
when the syllable is a part (of speech),' b)ge mad etar-
scartha ' uuless it be separated '
calléic, e«dléice ( < %en + léi«iud = 'without leavingoff'):
'still, even'; e.g. m)-n.avth'h D[a «alléi« 'God protects us
still,' ammi]dHti «alléie in tril,nbttionibus ' we are joyful
¢vel it tribulatiodbus.'
254. Concessive.
cit, ce: (usually lenitiu) 1,eore vowels ci, neg. ced,
ci, d, 'flthough ': when used with thc indicative it infixes d
excel,t, where thcre is «th'ea(ly «u infixed l,rOllOtm, e.g. c[a
rud.,'hncdatar ilbélre 'although they h«ve hcard lnany
buiguagcs,' but ce m«s.labrr«t,r 'alth(,ugh they speak them'
where the « of the 3rd pers. 1,1. is infixed : likc md it takes
the sul,junctive in hyl,othetieal or douht[ul cases, e.g. ci
as.bera e«h 'thoug'h any OliC Sty,' cicr du.gneid »m rdtu
sa 'though ye do these things': with thc copula cid, pl. cit,
'though it be, even,' e.g. cid do hutdr 'eveu for au hour,'
«ith etar.uidigthe 'even thoug it be interposed,' oit geinti
even (entiles.' cht followed by the subjunctive with or
without ro is used as an explicative, e.g. t[ hed to.t-beir i
tem cht ba Ioitgthe«h 'it is ltot this that brings thee to
heaven, that thou shouldest be a glutton,' i. hte[.ç.s.e ce ru.
*amall«rfri Cr[.«.t 'it is right that he should be compared
to Christ.'
das, ds, adds.: ( < * a" + d«ms = taas ?) in sg. used to
tender an isolated Lat. qttamffttan or quamv[.; with
na and cht 'although,' e.g. od««s cicr citabd 'etiam si
persentiat,' adas cio d-a-gndo 'though if I do it.'
255. Comparative.
amal, am8H: 'as'; e.g. am«d hguides.q ««thb" a maçc
'as a father beseeches his son,' umEdl ct.,-bM-ber alcdle 'as
sonle o11#3 says it.'
feib, ftb : 'as,' e.g. jëib fond.t«dr .qom la auetoru 'as
he bas found it in authors,'fib ces deg ro.pridehed 'as it
has been preached best.'
137
cruth : 'how, as' (sho,'tened from bt chruth 'in the form,
manuer'), e.g. ertth lo.i'idchi...em 'how we have preached,'
crtth na»dat chom.ddigthi 'as they are hot compounds.'
tnne, inni : 'as, such as,' e.g. i»me ro.l»'M«hed dib
'as bas been preached to you,' imd ro.m-bdtar r[nm bi
tempul ' such as they were before in the temple.'
méit: (from méit 'size, extent.'), 'as regards,' e.g. rugit
o. »)do .ç»'ibmtd 'as regards writing': méitm(it = ta»tttt»t
qtt¢ttttm, e.g. méit doffmbtag, r Jbrmd fi,«hilh, iss, i
m(it i»..i»z do.»ffnd»,g(«r iz dlth»md 'in proportion as
suflE]'ing is bestowed upou us, so is thc consol«ttion that is
bestowed': ni hed a »dita,'bt = »tc,»t solttms.cd etiam,
e.g. l hed a redit t,»t-chretid-si net fiMoimid ./bchidi
oiri'uot only do ye believe it, but ye endure suflrings
therefor.'
X.--THE ADVERBS
(For adverbs formed from adjectives v. § 7,, for adverbs
of place v. 96.)
256. ot time.
intliu ( < b, (the art. (?) or prep. (?)) + diu dat. of dia
' day'), ' to-day.'
inclé (< i»t (the art..) + dé which corresponds to W. doe,
Gk. ×0dç, Skr. hyah), 'yesterday': adj. from dg=
déthenachde ' hesternus.'
innocht, Lat. h«tc »octe, 'to-night.'
intremtlitl, W. tremgdd, 'three days after.'
rnntin (dat.) 'in the morning.'
inclorsn, bdossa ( < i»d 6r .sa ' this hour'), ' now.'
infechtsn, bdecht.o, 'this time.'
inc/innirn so 'at this rime.'
iartain afterwards; iarum afterwards; riam before.
talmaidiu (dat. of a noun) 'suddenly.'
aithirriuch (dat. of aithirrech 'repetition') ' again.'
tossuch (dort. of tossach ' beginning') 't first."
chtnn (dat. of cenn ' head, end') 'at the eud.'
moch ' early.'
do grés ' contimmlly.'
on nttritl ' from last yer.'
257. oî manner.
amin, amein, omne : (amin < «r«m-.in ' like that'D, e.g.
d-a-rigni amin '(he) ruade it thus,' i atone dognither
'i is hus it is done,' ol i. amein ' hecue it is so.'
immalle, immallei {immellei) : < imm-a"-le, le < leth
side,' together.
immanetar: 'inter se, invieem, lu tutu,' e.g. dech,o" eter
corpu, tal,nandi immonetar 'a diflçrence between earthly
hodies allOg themselves.' d-a-gnltis, on[-sin immenetor
'they used to da this in turn.'
139
APPENDIX A.
Loanxvords.
(v. Pedersen V.G. . 2l, I20 .eq., Thurn. [Il,. § 904 et «eq.)
258. from Britannic sources
cdi» ' bcautiful," W. cei: muirm(;rn 'sircns, mcrmfids,'
V. mo»forwy ; bilcmt 'sea-gull,' W. gwyla ; c»ai
'flcecc,' W. omif; t»'emdht ' lhrcc days ;trier." W. treyd
<tre«tyd; jbh'h 'wasps,' O. lb'ct, gu,d (). C.rn.
g,hic ; li«tthrit,e ' 1,alls,' W. Ilithr, ' to glidc.'
259. from Latin
(tt) Older borrowiugs introdueed by 1-h'itish inissionaries,
and eonsequeutly showing traces of lh'itannie infltteuee,
sueh as h-ish d for l«t. 6, e.g. ,lt,;ir 'altïve,' Tr[ml6it
'Triuitt-,' htmaldSit 'humilitït-,' pSc 'paeis' (oseuhmO,
also the et(lillg -dit fol.-drit., due to W. «tllor, TrbM¢«I,
ttjël[dod; loss of sylhddes as iu .,.'loir 'historia,' «t»9'«tib
'antigral,hulu,' lwmtit "paenitentia,' Mid. l-h'et, ste»', W.
ctrdr«tij) peyd; on this model later lo;utwords are also
fOl'lned, e.g. ordit, 'orêtio' ec[«ti.,, 'eeelesia,' ,,«warbaicc
' saevifieium'; the writiug of c, t, p for g, d, b after vowels,
and g, ¢t, b fol' T, ,/3, v § 4.
(b) Lttcl" ]»orrowillgS direct from Latiu writings. Thcse
are clmractcrizcd :--
(1) by falsc quautities, c.g. cci.st 'quacstio,' pred«'hhl or
pridchid 'praedicat,' c6r, chtar ' chïtracter,' Pdtraicc
"PStricius,' légaid ' lêgit' (prol,ably tmdcr thc influcucc o
c»'ibtM, Thuru.);
(2) by l'etention of somc fimtl syllables, c.g. g,e 'tmcit,'
caimm.e 'camisia,' as compared with .toir, eclais of (a);
(3) l»y changes (hm to thc analogy of native words, e.g.
grand 'grïtdus,' mêsar ' mensura," mebti" " mcmoria,'
(g = 3') ' saeeulum,' lebor ' liher,' after the amtlogy of
'love,' me.s 'judgment.' mebM ' shame,' b,[gttl 'danger,"
lebor ' long."
140
960. c, s, f for p, f, v.
In old loanwords the hish substituted c for p, s for f
aud f for «, proba|dy after the analo of the already
existing correspoude,ee lu cognate words like macc, W.
mat) ; ¢.rann, W. n'enn.; .r6n, W. )'oen: e.g. corcu"
' purpur«,' d,bn ' plum«¢.' caille ' pMlimn,' chtnd ' plauta,'
W. plant, (bllwaige' Ptrieius': sorn 'fur, ns,' sene.ter
' Dnestra,' .ian ' freuum,' ..rogell 'flagellun¢; fiurt 'uirtus,'
/[al 'uelum': in later borrowiugs p and f rcmain unclmnged,
e.g. topul 'polmlus,' pr««'elt ' precel,t«un,' P«tra[cc
' Patricius'; /ig«," ' figura,' fi'lsnb ' 1,hilosoldmS. '
961. Borrowed Verbs.
Borrowed verhs follow the coujugtiou of Class A I.:
adraim (' ador«u"e') is tre«tcd sonctimes as though ig were
a native COml}OU,«l verb, e.g. r«l.r-orsat 'they bave adored':
«dso con.ecratno ('eonsecrare'), e.g. ct«t..e«'ar 'he con-
seerated it.'
141
APPENDIX B.
OId Irish Orammatical Terms
(from the ,q.G. Glosses on Priseian).
Phonology.
' sound' «wuit ' aeute'
»uybffm" ' c,cophouy'
comjbgu" ' '
COll$OllllCe
.Ibg '"
nephcon ur lllçOI)8011.
deoguv (de-,g.) dq,hthong
liter ' letter'
c«r«whta" ' eharaeter'
abbgitir ' lphabct'
gutte ' vowel'
fftta.çn ' vocalism'
gaS'it ' short'
timmovte ' eontraeted'
ai»'d[.ve ' long'
oh'cent (-nd) ' accent'
groif' grave'
Declension.
«tathad Slllgllltl"
ila" plurl
cenél gender
ntt.ettl ' " '
maseuhne
masculindo ' mase.'
femin ' fcminine'
tui.el ' '
¢S
camthuisel 'oblique ese'
c«inmtid ' nomiuative'
ffeu[t[» ' genitive'
toba'thid ' dative'
6inMd ' accusative'
to9crthid ' voetivc'
ablatwe
loxhdd ' " '
d?dl declenslon
dilledach ' deelinablc'
tephdilled«wh ' indcelin.'
¢t[nnt l'én ' substantive'
t'O.s'Oi COIi.Ollilit'
leth9Eute ' scmi-vowel'
h.ehd,dt ' liquid'
Ittt " relire'
diuft ' simple'
diahul ' douhle'
elnuad ' doub]inf
ti»tfed ' asl i rat ioll"
séhn ' sm(.»th, lcliis'
sfflab ' syllsble'
uit ' ultima'
peneult " lcnultima '
coimmcDh,ud 'mutation'
ti»tiit n-dUes ' prol,cr noun'
aDti»t n-adiecht 'a({ieetive'
oiitl#t »i,-bi'iatDai'd« ' v. uoun'
di9E««btDa«D ' diminutive'
docaldiua«h ' appellative'
eomaiitinueehdecD 'syiionym.'
aithe»'i'«eDtailthe 'patroilynl.'
Duatuasail«lhe ' ahsohltc'
condely9 ' eonll,arison"
posit ' positive'
coinpai'it ' conlluu'ati c'
m«perlait ' supcrlative'
««»'th'ol ' article'
p»'otontet ( l'oto[b ) 'l,ronoun'
et t6 rcadach ' ana I h o vie'
ait'ebthe«h ' possessive'
oith.fo»'l.'othech ' demonst.'
imnwhomai'snech 'interrog.'
ém'etha,'h ' redditive'
««dch,imchladach 'reeiproeal"
142
coibeden ' COlljllgat.ioll'
.lillit«l ' flexion'
nlod « l|lood'
aimser ' tense'
.l?ee)dnirc ' lresen$ '
.echm«dachte ' pretcrite'
.. m,irbthe ' prcL. iml,f.'
«. jbirbthe ' pret. pevf.'
olbirbbe ' l,luperf.'
hMo«hide ' future'
t;e,'b'h d,e "aorist'
imlMit ' indicative'
«,,maccmol ' s,fl,junctive'
optait ' optative'
Conjuation.
.lbr/g(trthid ' imperative'
btfiuit ' infinitive'
geriud ' gerulld'
br[ahar ' verb'
b. g»dmo 'active verb'
b. césta 'passive verb'
diusc¢t rtnch ' del OllellL'
d e. immdch t h ech 'denomin.'
cdlnMe ' prindtive'
tairmtheçhtM 'transitive'
nephtnirmth 'intransitive"
ran»gabdil ' participle'
tarmoreenn ' termination'
delb ' paradfgnl'
Particles.
dobriath.r 'adverb' iaterie,'ht ' inteljeetion"
rem&ddigud ' tweposition' com«wcomol ' eonjunetion"
yntax.
tdb«e ' eoncision'
eonstruction"
«nalach analogy
composition' indlach ' diaeresis'
immo,.mam 1.,
i,mn.t"ognam
com.uidigud '
sreth ' ordre"
com.reith ' construction'
rcmthcchta. ' antel,osition'
t[armm'acht ' postposition"
accom.1 ' combination"
ram ins«e 'part of speech'
imptth ' anastrophe'
comnim)d[s ' alqosition'
eiscsin ' porrection"
erchra ' ellipsis'
comdhthad ' synaeresis'
di.@uthigud ' dcrivatiou'
intMiuch t'I,
Mond I signification
«imdud ' definition'
jblad ' substance'
c&ll 'sens< nmaldng"
imte ' qualiy'
guth ' voiee'
epert ' vocable'
Jbcul ' word"
2}tath ' figure'
nénug,«d " hiatus'
Prosody.
fer. ' verse' glanad ' elision'
traig 'foot' metar 'metre'
cetbargarait 'proeeleusmatie'
143
APPENDIX C.
Miscellaneous Paradigms.
as.beir ' says'
INDICATIVE.
deuterotonic.
1 as.biur
2 ,s.bir
3 as.beir
Pass. as.berar, as.berr
l as.beram
2 as.berid
3 a«.berat
Pass. a..berta-r
deuterotonic.
1 as.berMn
2 a.¢.bertha
3 as.bered
Pass. as.berthe
! mperfect.
Singular.
prototonic.
.eprbm
.epertha
.e1»'ed
.eperlhe
1 as.bermis
2 as.berthe
3 as.berti.s
Pass. as.berti«
Plural.
.eperm is
.eperthe
.epertis
.epertis
144
Future
Singular.
prototonie.
.epér
"epérae
.epéra
.epérthar
Plural.
.epé»'a m
.epéraid
.epérat
.epértar
deuterotonic.
1 a.s.bérinn
2 as.bértha
3 a.s.bérad
Pass. as.bérthe
1 a...bérmi.s
2 as.bdrthe
3 as.bérti.¢ Pass. as.bértis
Future Preterite.
Silgular.
protoonie.
el»é»'in n
.epé»'tha
.epérad
.epé»'the
Pluntl.
.epdrmN
.epgrtbe
.epgrtN
.epértN
deuterotonie.
1 as.bim't
2 as.birt
3 as.bert
Pass. a..breth
1 as.bertmar
2 a,.bertid
3 as.bertahtr
Preterite.
Singular.
prototonic.
('elmrt)
.epirt
.epert
"el»'ed
Plural.
(.epertmar)
(.cpertid)
(.epertatar)
145
deuterotonic.
1 as.rubm't
2 a..rubah't
3 as.rubart
Pass. as.robrad
Perect.
Singular.
prototonic.
.érburt
.grb.irt
.érbart
.érbrad
1 as.rubartmar
2 as.rubartaid
3 a..rubartatar
Plural.
.érbartmar
.érbartaid
.rbrtatar
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.
1
2 epir
3 el»'ed
131t|r.
et)l'ellt
epret
SUBJUNCTIVE.
deuterotonic.
1 as.ber
2 as.berae
3 as.bera
Pass. as.berthar
1 a..beram
2 a,«.berM
3 a.¢.berat
Pass. a..bertar
k
Present.
Singular.
prototonic.
.eper
.ep re
.eprea
.eperthar
Hm'al.
"el»'e o t
.eprid
.epret
.epertar
146
Preterite.
,ingular.
prototonic.
.eprhm
.epertha
.epred
.eperthae
Plural.
.epermis
.eperthe
.eperti.
.epertais
Verbal noun
Passive participle
Participle of necessity
epert
eperthae
eperthi
deuterotonic.
1 do.biur
2 do.bir
3 do.beiv
Pass. do.berar, do.berr
l do.beram
2 do.berid
3 do.berat
Pass. do.bertar
do.beir ' gives'
INDICATIVE.
Present.
Singular.
lWOtotonie.
.tabm"
.tabair
.tabair
.tabarr
Plural.
"taibrem
.taibrid
"taibret
.tabartar
147
deuterotonic.
l do.berim
2 do.bertha
3 d¢,.bered
Pass. do.herthe
1 do.bermis
2 d«»berthe
3 d,.berti.s
Pass. do.bertis
dcuterotonic.
l do.bér
2 do.6érae
3 do.béra
Pass. d,».berthar
1 do.béram
2 do.bdraM
3 do.bérat
Pass. do'bértar
do.bérthar
deuterotonic.
1 do.bérimt
2 do.bértha
3 do.bérad
Pass. do.bérthe
Imperfect.
Singular.
prototonie.
.taihrhtn
.t«tbartha
.taibred
.t««barthe
Plural.
.tabarmt
"tabarthc
.talmrtis
.tabartis
Future.
Singular.
1 «'ototouic.
.tibdr
.tibdra
.tibdrthar
Plural.
.tibérc«
.tibéraid
.til»érc«t
"tibét
l'assi e.
ingular.
.tibérthcr
Future Preterite.
Shgular.
lwototonic.
.tibérim
.tibérta
.tibérc«d
.tibérthe
1 do.bérmis
2 do.bérlhe
3 do.bertis
Pass. do.bértis
148
Plural.
.tibermis
.tibérthe
.tibértis
tibé'tis
Preterite.
deuterotonic.
1 (do.biurt)
2 do.birt
3 do.bert
Pass. do.breth
Singular.
prototonic.
(.taburt)
.tabirt
.tabart
.tabrad
1 do.bertmar
2 do.bertid
3 do.bertatar
Pass. do.bretha
Plural.
.tabartmar
.tabartid
.tabartatar
(.tabartha)
Perfect (in sense of ve).
deuterotonic.
1 do.rata.«
2 do.rati.
3 do.rat
Pass. do.ratad
Siugular.
prototonic.
.tartus
.tart«is
.tarat
.tarat
1 do.vatsam
2 do.rat.id
3 do.mtsat
Pass. do.ratta
Plural.
tic 't.s'a m
.tar.¢aid
.tartis.s.et, .tartsat
.tarta
149
Perfect (in sense of '1,ring').
deuterotonic.
l do.uccus
2 dom«cis
3 do.ui«, do.««
Pass. do.tccad
1 do.uicsem
2
5 do.m'.«t
Pass. do.uctha
Sing.
1
2 tab«tir, tui
3 taibred
I/IPERATIVE.
Plur.
taibrem
taibrM
t a ib re t
SUBJUNC'FIVE.
Present.
deuterotonie.
1 do.ber
2 do.berue
3 do.bera
Pass. do.berth.r
1 do.beram
do.berM
3 do.berat
Pass. do.bert(tr
150
Preterite.
Singular.
deuterotonic, l«'ototonic-
1 do.beraim .taibrim
2 do.berlha .tabarlha
3 do.berad .taibred
Pass. do.berthae .tabarthae
Plural.
1 &,.berma: .tabarmi.
2 do.berthae .tabarthae
3 do.bertai,. .ta5artai.
Pass. do.berta .rabattais
Sul,junctive corresponding to perfect do.rat.
Present.
Ningular.
deuterotonic, prototonic.
1 do.rat .fart
2 do.ratae .tartae
3 do.rala .tarta
Pass. do.rattar .tartar
Plural.
1 do.ratam .tartam
2 do.rataid .tartaid
3 do.ratat .tarta!
Pass. do.rattar .ta rtar
deuterotonic.
1 do.rataimt
2 do.ratta
3 do.ratad
Pass. do.rattae
Preterite.
Ningular.
prototonic.
.tartaimt
"tarta
ta rtad
ta rt«e
1.51
deuterotonie.
I do.rafmai.
2 do.rattae
3 do.rattais
Pass. do.rattai.
Plural
prototonw.
.tartmm
.tartae
.tarais
Suhjunctive corresponding to do.uc
deuterotonie.
1 do.uc
2 do.t«ecae
3 do.t«cca
Pass. do.ucthar
etc.
Present.
Ningular.
prototonie.
.ttç
.tccae
.tm'tar
etc.
I do.uccainn
Preterite.
Singular.
.tuccainn.
Verbal noun
Participle of necessity
tabart, tabairt.
tabarthL
do.gnl ' does.'
INDICATIVE.
deuterotonic.
1 do.gnhe (.gn5n)
2 do.gn[
3 do.gn[
Pass. do.gMther
Present.
Singular.
prototonie
.ddnim
.déni
.déni
.déntar
1 do.gdmmis
2 do.guithe
3 do.ynltis
Pass. do.gnitis
deuterotonic.
1 do«jén
2 do.géuae
3 do.géta
Pass. do.géutar
1 do.géuam
2 do.génid
3 do.gguat
Pass. (do.gdta ta r)
152
Plural.
prototonic.
.dénam
.ddMd
.démt
"dénatar
imperîect.
Singular.
prototolfiC
.dénimt
(.dénta)
.dénad
.déute
I qui'al.
"déumis
.dénte
ddu tis
"déntis
Future.
Singular.
prototonic.
.digen
.digne
.diguea
.digetar
Plural.
alignera, "digemtm
.dignid
.diguet
(.digniter)
15:»
Future Preterite.
Preterite.
Sg. 3 do'gd»H, prototon. "tligti, 1,1. 3 do.géinset.
Pass. do.gdth, 1,rototon..d&uut.
Perfect.
Ningulal'.
l,rot«tonie.
j .deirgdms
J oe.dergeds
J .deirgéni, .dcrni
[.deirgmi, .deirgni
.dernad
1 do.roé.am
2 do.rigétMd
3 do.rognsat
t':tss, do.rdnta
Plural.
oe.dergesid
.derg(nsat
.dernta
»UBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Singular.
prootonie.
.d&ae
.tl&m
Plural.
.dénid
.dénat
.dénatar
deuterotonic
1 do.geimz
2 do.g»tetha
3 do.g»teth
Pass. do.gnethe
1 do.gwmmi.
2 do.gnethe
3 do.g»wti.
Pass. d(,'gnet
Preterite.
Singular.
prototo,ie.
.dénta
.d&tad
dé», te
Phu'al
.dénmi."
.d&te
.ddntis.
d& tis
Sing.
1
2 dé»e
3 d&md
IMPERATIVE.
Plut.
dénM
dénat
Verbal noun
Passive participle
Participle of necessity
d&tom, dénum
(d&tte)
d&ti, dginti
absolute.
1
2 tégi
3 tgit
rel. téte
Pass. tagair
1 llagmai
rel. t[agmae
2 téit
3 t$agait
rel. tiagtae
Sg. 3 .téiged
absolute
1 rea
2 reg(te
3 regaM
rel.
Pass. ri,athir
155
téit ' goes'
INDICATIVE.
Present.
Singular
eonjunet.
.t[ag
.téig
.tét
.tiagar
l'lural.
.tagam
.tgit
.t$agat
Pl. 3 .teigti.«
etc.
utur¢.
Singular.
emOuuct
.regae
.
*'wgthor
156
ahsolute.
rel. regme
2regthe
3 rega[t
rel.%'egte
t'Ira'al.
eonjunct.
Future Preterite.
.ing. Plur.
2 "vigtha ('rigthe)
3 "ri,dad .regtais
Preterite.
Sg. 3 luid, rel. hdde, pass. ethae ;1,1. 3
Perfect.
Singular.
leuterotonic. lwototonic.
1 do.cood .de('hud
2 do.cood .dechud
3 do.coïd, do.cuaM .dechuid
Pass. do.coa. (.dic]e.s)
Plural.
I do.commar "de«hummar
2 do.roMM "digtith
3 d,,cotar, d«»cuatar .de«hutar
157
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
tlas.u, &e. : v. § 129.
t'hu'al.
I (do.coisem) .dechnm
2 do.coisid "diff:';«l
3 do.coiset .dich.et
Preterite.
Singu|ar.
dettterotottic, pr,totonic.
1 do.coi.inn .dichs.(dm
2 do'coista (.di«ha.ta)
3 do.coised .dichsed
Plural.
1 do.coismi. (.di,'he.mi.s.)
2 do.coiste (.dicheste)
3 do.coistis .decb.aiti.
deuterotonic.
1 do.tlag
" d tdig
O"
3 do.tét
Pass. do.tiagar
1 do.t[agam
2 do.tdt
3 do.t[agat
1 d..téiginn
etc.
deuterotonic.
1 do.rcg
3 (do.rega
) do.riga
1 do.regam
2 do.reg(dd
3 do.regat
. ( do.regad
S,,.._ «[d,,.rgctd.
Plural.
.tait
"taOat
! m perfect.
Singular.
(.tdiginn)
etc.
Future.
Singular.
prototonic.
I .tery(«
I .tirga
Plural.
.terga[d
.tergat
Future Preterite.
( .th'ffad
etc.
Sg. 3 do.luM
Pass. do.eth
1'1. 3 do.lotar
deuterotonie
1 do.dechud
3 do.de«huid
1 do.dechommar
3 do.dechutar
Preterite.
.tolid
etc.
.tultatar
Perfect.
ingular.
prototonic.
.tuidched
Pass..tuMche.
Plural.
.tuid«hetar
159
deuterotonic.
1 do.tias
3 do.t(i
etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Sinular.
prototonic.
-tde.q
.tai
etff.
deuterotonic.
1 do.téMnn
etc.
Preterite.
Singu]ar.
1,rototonic.
.tai.inn
etc.
Subjunctive corresponding to Perfect.
Present.
Singtllar.
deuterotonic. 1,rototonie.
3 do.de«ha .tudi,'h, .tuidi9
cte. etc.
Preterite.
Singular.
3 do.dh'h.ed .tuidehissed
etc. etc.
IMPERATIVE.
Sg. 2 tait Pl. tait
3 tait, tdet taig, t
There is a subi. fonned from this t«ti»" of the 2nd sing.
imper, riz. 3rd sg. terri, tab" "let him corne," pl. tairset.
160
APPENDIX D.
SI'ECI31EN,'-; I»l," OLI) IRI,'-;H I'HO.'-;E AND POETRY.
First .Stage.
1. D.laffni maqi D.li ()ham) 'of lalagnos, the son of
lht]os.' . Lie Luff«aedon ma««i 3Ienuch 'The stone of
l,ugu-ae(|, the son of 3[enh.'
Aecond Stage.
1.--FRoM THE CA311;RI HL31II.Y.
(a) In.cee in.o a.'bcr af ff:da u fi'i «aeb n-oein (lin
«hen6ht doin¢,re.n-imlarbe anal«bi ovd o«u. a pectht
ocu.; a ra.tin,ffa .oal,'h i o«u« a'e'n-a irema fi«th u o««. airde
«rt««h« af ('hr[.t, céin h«s i ««m,u. «virp ocus «mme. aire.
se«hetha" Mb'tu a../ëd, t i n-da9n[m'athih.
(b) .li" i., d a becs nta beth ha 9al««r I»e« fin" corp
duini, m« ffovith Io«.e «ith b, e chm nu b, e ldbn nu in e
n6raib, fo.geb" a t-ggalar in uile eorp : is amlith i.
comada. duret chani.s'in, fo.n-gera ca,'h n-évnail ()6ire
mmdcm membre" uili (ht 1)ea--a('h cd..alh ocu.s" a
cala" be.«, fit5" e chonme..am.
(c) Fihts tre «henéhe nm'tre daneu ad.rhnito" af
cbrub'b da duiniu net dos.gng : baanmart'e ocus glas-
ma't'e ocres dergma'tre. L M i.r bEnma'tre dt,. duiniu
in tain rca»'as av Dea fi'i ca«h reet cara.% ce vu.cEsa dt)ri
nu l, ubi»" -oco ; is si ind glasm«o.tve d6, in tain s«ara
ff'i, thola leu t cd, sa. rdithor i lqemdt ocus aithrigi: i.« si
in der«mavtre d6, foditt, chmwhe octs dior«ne et»" ChrL.t,
ara,il tond.echomnuchub" dundaib ab.tolaib, oc in9vim-
mire inna cloen ocui.« oe jbrcetul recto Dee. Con.9aibeta"
imm tre chenél martre so i.snib colnidib tu.thégot dag-
atbrigL .carde fi'ia tota, cgste s6ithu, tt.e.s.mot a fitil i
-«Hni ocuis i laubai" af CbrLrt. Filus d,nett tre chenéle
nart»'e ,tta ldgmara le Dea, ara.n-étatbam-ni f,cb'iei,
161
Note the arehaie forlllS ced (tad), are (ara), fédot
(.fi(tdat), Dec (D[a), e (a) poss. pron. 3rd sg., .nmde»t
(»o»da»), ocds (ocw), fibt.,'=fil with sutlixed proie. 3rd
pl., amctil (a»al), dodaib (domdb), and the verhs with
proclitic te, tt (de, dt), tt.thégot v. Introd.
TRANSLATION.
(a) This is the saying which our lord Jesus saith to
evel'y one of the race of mon, that ho hanish frein hiln (his)
vices and his sins, aud that ho gather virtues and reeeive
stiglnata and signs of the ('ross for Crist's sake, se long as
he is in power of hody a|ld seul, that he follow the traeks
of oui" I,ol'd in good deeds.
(b) For this is its usage, if there he any little aihnent on
a man's body, if it hurns a place, whether in his foot or in
his hand. or in lais fingers, the disease inflanms the whole
body. Thus it is fitting fol" us ourselves, that every
suffering and every aillnent that is on his neighbour should
inflame erery part (!)--fOl" we are ail inembers unto God.
(c) New there arc three kinds of Inartyrdoln whieh are
eounted as a cross te man, if he perforln theln (riz.) white
nmrtyrdolu, and green inartyrdom, and red inartyrdoln.
This is the white Illal't)'l'dOIIl te Ill,"tn, when he separates
for thc sake of God frein evel'ythin:z ho loves, although he
suflr fasting or labom" thereat: this is the green Inartyrdoln
te him, when by IlleallS Of thcm (i.e. fasting and labour) he
separates frein his desires, or suffers toil in pelmnce and
rclelatance ; this is red martyrdom te hiln, endurance of a
cross or destruction for Christ's sake, as lins halq,cned te
the Apostles in the lersecutiol of the wickcd and iii
teaching the law of God. Thesc three kinds of martyrdom
are colnlu'ised in the carlml ones who resol't te good
repentallce, who separate frein their desires, who surfer
trouhles, who pour forth their blood in fasting and iii labour
for Christ's sake. There are, then, three kinds of martyr-
dom which are precious iii God's eyes, for which we obtain
rewards if we fulfil them.
1
162
2.--FROM THE STOWE |ISS;AL.
(a) A'a tri ,'hémmet ciige. in fer graith
to.cb)g «t'itbi i. ed a tfCe b-imruimdethar «ncb
«h6te, .i. bi mbrgthir bi coccll bi
(b) Ls-ed ira t. b« In Dt memnne do buith bi
.ligraib in (t'ind ,'orop he to memome id ram ara.
.t;,cmi db obli amail bilh ball di ('hri.t
nr««.mbç cro«h ««Htbir.tbr ,'ach e rit fgb, dre t-6etdgether
fri.in «o crochtbe.
Note «çfritbi.i (erithii), tocitg (do.cbg), and even fo
for htter do l,OSS, lwon. 2nd sg.
TRANSLATIt)N.
(,t) The thrce stel,s which the ord«dned man steppeth
1,ackwards and which he ag'ain stel,s forward, this is the
triad in which everyone sis, Le, in word, in thought, in
deed.
(b) This is what Ood deems worthy, the mind to be in
the symbols of the Mass, and that this be thy mind : the
1,wtion of the Host which thou reeeivest (to-be) as it were
ci member of Christ from His Cross, and that there may be
a cross of lal,our on each fin) his own course, because it
unites to the crucified Body.
Third Stage.
Fo_t THE3[ILAN (_;LOSSES ON THE PSAL_IS.
1.4 ed.cdl )'br.ailhmiwdar i.imli-.iu : dbt.hdd
». Iogai re Sdd, hem .ide larron dia tb@m .çom co
lag, gabtbe dmd les fris a»" itmillit.. Do.luid
D(mM iamtm aM«hi ro.bol ctcu im-a n-dbad luid co
port i m-boi it
ri 7 con.oscaig fit gae 3 sdid.s.i li ala #cubm Siul hi
talmain :
di»M sl6g 3 ar.9«trt doib di m6di att m«itb «ot.roit«tar
a-rri9. 'DgcaM n eredig 3 a arma, cia indas rund.
gabsat ' In ab»sir i»t tind»acuil sitt diditt du.tt-gcom-
tacht
8aln 8o.
163
TRAN.LATION.
This is the story to which he rcfers bore: when ])avid
went into exile 1,clore Saul, t.he latter went aftemvards to
pursue him wit.h a host, and a camp wzs pitched by him
(Saul) against him (1)avid) for l,rotection, l)avid then
came one evening to theln into thcir camp, and he went
to the I,lace in which the King was in particular, and
removed the Killg'S cup, and removed the sl,eal" , and fixed
it 1)y one of Saul's chceks in the ground: and aftcrwards
the said David weut to a hill that was ncarest to the host
and humted them thcncc that thcy had not guardcd their
King well. " Bchold ye his cup and his arlns, ]lOW they
are" It was at. the time of that giving whereby God
delivered the afore-mcntioned Saul into his hands that he
sang this 1,salin.
Poetry.
Frot TtIE ST. ÇALL [»RISCIAN.
1. Is ach«r fit ga:th iwuocht
jh.j)ta.a Jairgga' fiudçfolt :
n['d9or réimm ll[,'«t 3[im
doM IdechraM lai» un Lothlind.
Note the poetic license in the ordcr of the
fairgga'fid-filt for prose jbM4EEblt i»ma fidrgg«e.
words
TRANSLATION.
Bitter is thc wind to-night,
It tosses thc ocean's white hair :
I fear hot the coursing of the Irish Channel
By the tierce heroes from Lothleld.
164
II.
Fomm.«hah col memt--medah" mass--
h[ i-brot glas, de dindgna[b do.s'.
dd-brdth nom-«].»i»di.-co[ma
cah.,¢'ribaimm jo rohla
Note the poetic license in the order of u'ordsfidbaid«e
fdl, rolda ross for prose fil [ma fidbaidw, roa¢ bd rolda ;
also the infixing hot only of the pronoun but also of the
subject in no-m-choimmdiu-cohna.
TRANSLATION.
I.
A hedge of trees surrounds me,
A blackbird's lay sings fo mel,raise which I
will hot hide
Al»ove my hooklet the lincd onc
The trilliug of the birds sings fo me.
II.
The clear euckoo sings to me--a beantiful chant--
In a gray mantle from the tops of the bushes.
By the God of I)oom '. May thc Lord protect me !
I write well under the greenwood.
FROM THE CODEX . PAULL
1. A 1,oem ascribed to Snilme Geilt, a chieftain who
beeame insaue at the 1)attle of Magh Rath in the year 637.
Sarauw suggests that his airitcldn was his grave.
Barr Edin.
65
II.
¢;obbdn du.rigni i,.in--
«on.éce.çtar dt«ib a stoir--
mu chridecdn, D[a da
hé t«ga6ir rod.toig.
III.
Tech i-mt.fcra .fie,'hod
,oaigen 'm«iigder ritdi
.oil.'Mir bid bi h«gbm.t,
os é «en «dm««ht t-imbL
TRAN.-;LATION.
The Crown of lvy.
My little oratory in Tuaim Inhir,
There is hot a full bouse whieh is more pleasing (?) :
With its st«rs agreeal,ly to (one's) wish,
With its SUll, with its moon.
II.
ç;obbfin bas made that.--
That its story may be told to you--
My heartlet, God from heaven,
He is the hateher who has thatehed it.
III.
A house wherein rMn l,ours hot,
A p|ace wherein thon fearest hot spear-points,
Bright as though in a garden,
And it without a fenee (.) around it.
166
,)
III.
(') ru.biam--.«él con .s'cL--
im,-ar tegdai. af
t«ff tb imo--dh'hrlchMe rliu.--
ni Jri.4.tarddam af n-dthin.«.
Gndth h,iaraib af gre.,aib gal
glenaid hwh bm-a lin .am :
o." mé. dt:fuit ira Ih ('héin
dliged n-doraid ct¢ n-dron-çbéill
167
VII.
C'la beimmi amin mwh ré,
ni.derban «d«b a ché&.
maith la cechtar ndr a ddn,
mtbaigthiu., a denm'dn.
VIII.
Hé fesin as choim.M drb«
in muM du.n-gM ca«h 6en-16u ;
dt thabairt d¢,raM du glé
./br mt mad «tçu «cm (dru ) mess.c.
TI;ANSI.ATION.
I
I and white l'anvur,
Each of us at his special art :
His nlind is at hunting (miee),
My own miud is in my sl,eeial eraft.
II.
love to rest, l,etter than any faine,
At my hooklet with diligen science :
White Panmn" is llot envious of llle,
He himself loves his ehihlish art.
It is customary at times by feats of valour,
That a mouse stieks in his net,
As for me, there falls into my own net
A ditlqeult dictum with hard meaning.
16,8
He points against the wall's fonce
His eye, this glancing full one ;
I myself point against the clearness of science
My clear eye, though Jt is feêhle.
He is joyOllS with sleedy goin',
Where mouse stieks in his sharp claw ;
Where I undel'stand a diflicult dem' question
As fol" me, I too ara joyc«ls.
VII.
Though we are thus always,
Neither hinder.,_" the other,
Each of us tw» likcs his art.
It (i.e. his art) dclights them (or 'him') by itsclf
[or 'lt delights him alcme'].
VIII.
He himself is toaster
()f the work which he does every day;
To lwin difficulty to elearness
At. my own work (toaster) ara l.
Note thc rhyme of filial aceented long vowels with filial
mlaccented short as in elg--ingn5, glé--me.ç.«ê; for the order
in J)'ega fdl, déne dul, cf. fidbaM«e fdl ; f»'i...t(«rddam is
for tel. j''isn.tarddam: in m«baigthits the suftixed pronoul
s is probably hot ldur. or fera. sing., but mase. sing. as
frequently in Mid. Irish, and rcfers to dd» CThurn.).
169
INDEX OF IRISH XVORDS.
[The references are to pages : m,,st eoml)ound verhs arc
give,, thus---aeeai (fris)].
A
page
a (poss. pron.) 50
a', «'t (with roc.) 41
£' ('o@) 131
al,alliH 133
aM, :I 5
aljl ,g'itir 31
aeanim (fo) - 119
aeeai (fris) 106
aeeastar (fris) 106
-aeeat (fris) 120
aeeatar 11 6
aecns 4i
achad ] 3
aehcd 13
acht - 21
aeht 134, ] 35
acre - I12
act 134
acus 131
ad 112
a(laas 136
adaig 30
adas 41
adas (eonj.) - 13(;
adblam 118
ade 57
adib 101
a«h'aim 140
ad rol'saL 140
aes 17
afameinn 1 .)o
page
afamenad 133
a[omensa ] 33
agid 21
-iigor 19
ai 511
aieei 106
aidehe 30
aidgue 113
aig 40
aired 40
fiil(liu 14
aile l,, 4s, 59
aill 43
ahl 82
ainlthiue :19
aingliu 12
Ainmire 34
aillmin 38
aillllllle :6
ainsem 1 12
air 112
ail" (conj.) 1 :;4
airdirc 112
aire 32
airechdae 42
airegde 42
airmdis 104
«iii'me 20
airndip 104
afs 17
aisndet l 17
170
page
aisndis 117
aissclhi (do) - ] 12
Mthesc - 113
aitb'ue 88, 113
aithirriueh - 13
aithminter (fur) 119
aithrea 12
ala 20
alaili 59
alaill 43
aleeh 34
51gim (fo) 112
ail
al,, 34
al 84
alt6ir 139
ara 20, 101
tire 135
amail 13, 136
amal 130, 136
amein 138
amiu 13S
ammi 1 O1
ammin I O1
ammns l I
atone 138
aIurae t3
anaeul
anad -
anair 60
almll - 60
amunchfiirtes 39
amuneharae - 39
andess 0
aneehtair 60
anzraib 139
am 26, 59
aniar 60
«mis
amuaimm
llllltllll
antfiaid
.llli
"alfir
a l*stal
11' u
araile
ara-th;
ariette
ar}mimm
al'] )or
ardis
ardtl
are
arggit
arinlp
al'llll ,a
armlip
arrad (i n-) -
-an'cher (do) -
art
autl
as (rerb)
as
ascae
60
37
37
45
60
37
6o
3.5
117
19
!34
14
34
23
14
104
I4
3,«
3s
lo4
45
34
3
104
103
104
130
20
21
37
117
35
10, 46
45
1?1
page
101
20, 101
]12
113
]13
- 113
1l, 38
i12
17, 39
112
39
113
103
57, 131
103. 104
39
105
50
15
11
42
43
31
130
1t
113
54
30
30
42
85
13
-I,ered
1,erid
hertit
bdste
l,,;sO, IéStl
1,ethu
.hotis
héo, béu
bi
bia,l
hiail
I ,i I ,d u
bicc
hiece
1,idci (do)
hiid
bind
l»indius
hiru
hith (fo)
1,ithe
hithin (fu)
-hir
bivt
-b/u
biud
-lùm'
bliadain
hohig
boeh t
*bocht
1,oict
boie
l«)ill
page
15
11
11)4
a.3, 39
17, "2"2
43
35
4"2
4"2
23
39
39
13o,
! 30
71
s4
18
18
15
30
39
8.
45
s6
100
43
lO
16
172
C
t.ftch
cSch
-cachain
,-aeh-la
«.adAin
,-Sech
caille
(.;tillmse
eain
efii rddine
efiil'te;
ealléie, -léiee
«mnmiph, -aih
eani, eain
t';t ll,',i -
page
(;S car -
- 7 s cfirachtar -
30 carae
«- d
.) earatra
36 cateat
38 cath
34 cathir
0 .cear (ad)
s; eech
34 .eeehan
34 ecehtar
30 .eechuin
:lg ced, ceith
I l cdimm
1; cdin ('.df')
37 cdin, cdiue
30 ccist
16 cele
3 -cdla -
cclt
Cll -
céne
59 cendl
59 ccnid
4 celnnithi
9 eenn (tar)
.,N centat
17 -c6r
140 cesi
139 cesh
47. 139 -cess
39 cesu
- 36 cdt
136 cét (rerb)
22 cdt-
135 ccta-hi
5- cétal
30 cètl,uid
page
18
- 139
13, 35
- 40
- 56
1.3, 32
34
106
.59
S4
59
13
104
14, 37
58
132
139
12, 28
80
114
41
It
102
llt
130
40
85
56
58
86
7, 101
14, 21, 3.7
86
48, llt
- 11
- 88
114
céte
ceth (ad)
ccthardae
cctheoir
cethcora -
cether (ad) -
ccthir
cctorcha
cet h ramad
cethmmthu -
cethrar -
ctmad
cétnae
cetu
cetu-
chem
chimm (ar, di)
chuit
cia (pvon.)
cia, ce (coj.)
cial »o
ciach
ciaptar
ciasu
cwh -
-cichestar (ad)
cichlus (ad) -
cichnaigistir -
-ciehurr (fo) -
cid (interrog.)
cid, cith
('111
cmg
cmged
cmgid
CllI
page
7
106
49
8
106
47,
47
48
- 49
49
- t8
-
7, 101
-t
34
130
130
130
56
136
103
34
103
lO1
104
5
106
83
56
- 104
35
35
35
21
15, 27
cinta
cis/
cit
cita-roba
cither (ad)
citnc
citu-
ciuir
'illllll
claid (ad)
claide
claidcl»
claidb6nc
clainde
claisse
cland
clé -
-cleth
eli
cliu
cloth
cluincd
cld
clfim
cn«iim
cmimai
co (l»'ep.)
co" (coff.)
co (co6.)
cobodlus
-cobra
cocart
coemnachtar (do)
coi (do)
c6ic
page
33
104
114
106
5
16
42, 87
140
86
43
43
43
16
67
39
1 .t0
la»
al
13
114
132
13, 115
77
174
3(;,
page
47
49
48
49
I15
115
84
115
114
115
104
115
104
115
104
11.5
104
lO4
1(}4
31
ll5
103
11:3
104
106 115
115
11.5
1(}1
czudad
c.ndae
collda¢l
condat -
c,,utlairc (ad)
coudelc
c.n,
c-.did
co.dieig
COl]ecaL
courir
conitged
coni
COIIiCC
conicub
c6ir
COI I'l
conid
coniptis
COllll«t
comdch
consecraimm
con-utaing
.corathar
corbu
COl'('lll"
cor:thdu
coscc
cos
cosmil
cosmilius
cosmuil
cossin
cote
coteet
19,
page
101
42
1 O1
1(}6
23
3
1 (}4
lOl
115
106
107
106
106
106
t5
115
l(-}l
104
106
132
o) .)
140
124
106
104
103
42
45
3
57
115
39
13
O
56
56
175
Cothraige
(21"}[1111
cpd
creiec
-Cl'eS8
ereteln
eretmeeh
er/ad -
eride
crideefin
Cl'llilll
('1'111111
crnth
,.uaid (ad)
-efiala
euhaid
ell]»tlS
euimre«h -
cuimrigib
cuimsimmis -
cuintea -
cuire
-euirifar
euiriur
"(211111
-elllllai
eunmehtaeh -
eumaehtae
eumaehtehu -
cumachtu
ctlnlallg
-eumeaibed
-eumeaL
-eumgat
-eumgub
page
104
35
42
40
16
4l, 137
36
115
34
115
"»'» l l 5
2, 115
106
77
74
79
72
106
106
19
"28
20
115
106
106
14, 106
106
page
emntaeh 113
cmnung lS, 21
cm (for) - 1(;, 7l
cutrumnms - 115
cut-seear 140
Do
dfi 47
daltae 28
,laltu "'8
data (mmn) - "'3
dan 14
(laneu 133
daniu 133
dano 133
dar 13, 12s
dm'ach - 34
daro 34
dathar 98
dàu 17, 47
dau r 2 l
dd - 35
de (prep.) 46, 115
dëae - 48
deaeht 39
dead (i ») 130
dçcce 115
dech 46
deehmad 48
dechor 115
ddde 49
dég 130, 134
degaid (i u-)- 130
ddicce 74
deich - 13, 21, 47
deichde 49
176
deichenhor
dcithldv
dc-meccim
dcmnae
dolllllll
denai
ddne -
d,:ne (irai,.) -
d,:nithir
ddniu
ddnOln
ddnum
ddr
-dercaiher
«ldrig
«leroima
de-sillabach -
dcsiu
dessid -
de -
dét (ce,'b)
deug
di
di (du)
di (l»'ep.)
dïa
dia" (omj.) -
di;d
dmll
dian
dib
dil drciud
dicoissin
didiu
-didma
p3.ge
49
42
2l
116
2,
21
39
74
45
47»
19
11.5
14
106
115
115
127
47
60
123
13, 35
86
- 33
- 47
77
- 115
- 28
39
131, 134
3.5
28, 115
39
47
23
105
- 133
80
page
disaire - 31
d/gal 40, 115
di,,.:e 33
(liglae 17
diglaid 40
dile - 17
diill - 28
diis - 49
d/le 37
dilgcnd 8
diliu 37
di-meeeither - 116
dilm 36
di.I'ogbad 116
di-t: 104
di-taam 1 ()4
di-that 104
dithrub 115
dltiu 8, 115
dimtag 115
diull 2,5
dixnigur 105
dligtl,ech 19
dlongid 81
dlui" 16
do (prep.) 13, 1°$ , 129
(lo (pos.. )''O»l.) 50
d,; - 47
doail - 20
do-acaldmach 1:28
do-l,riathar - 12
do-éci - 123
do.cod 115
docoissin 105
dochu 45
dochum 130
dod-f,ngad 118
do-fuisim 125
177
doieh
-dold
doinaeh
cio/ni
do-in61a
do.léiei
Çl,,-mmeiceither
dolllllll
domes]»c
dorchae
do-ra¢
do.rega
do-riga
do.rigni
do.riltiset
do.rogl»ad
drel »rang
drui
.duaid
d ul »
d ul »glass
dfiil
(lflilcm
duinn
duini
duiniu
dundaib
dfls
dfithracht
E
é, (h)é
ec|l -
eebrad -
4.5
1(17
30
13
116
20
133
43
128
1 "28
128
127
- 17
116
85
17, 35
107
16, 44
42
40
40
40
40
29
29
25
57
16
49
117
15
40
echtar
echtar-geindi
ecilsc -
eclais -
eclastai -
-ecmaing
eemaing (do)
ecolso
cd, (h)ed
edhart -
Aici (do)
eirr
eirred
Cl'set (ass)
éis (do)
disc
eisse
ella (do)
cllach
ellug (i
dlued
élnithid
éhtd
é111
emith, emid -
Cil ,9,o,e _
énirt
eoeh
eoehu -
Eoehu
epert -
-epret
el,scop -
¢1"
el'a -
erdairc
érice
Eriu
page
ll6
ll6
20
139
87
126
106
49
ll2
106
123
117
130
28
107
ll6
123
130
40
ll7
135
131
123
lit
2.
34
ll7
19
19
112
85
112
ll7
37
178
esl ae
escarae
ési (tar)
esrechtait
essarr (do)
ess:irgiu
-Pstnr
estir
-é
et, arcer
etargne
etarthothaim
eter.certa
Cer (con)
etir-gen
etrantach
éu
llIl
Fo
fit
fAcab
.fAeib
fadéin
fadesin
fa-dess
fdilid
faillsem
f,ilti
fAiltiu
fSith
fithsine
far, bar
far-cuimsitis
fedan
41,
page
117
117
13O
117
117
17
1)7
77
4
117
117
117
llï
123
IlS
llï
34
1S
57, 131
119
: 58
58
59
39
45
39
45
39
39
50
119
88
feib
féich -
f,:in -
fele -
fn -
feotar (do) -
fer
ferAn
ferr
fessin
-festar
fiach -
f/ad
fiada -
fiadn
f/al
.fiastnr
fib
fiche
fichetmad
figor -
fil -
file
filedach
fili
film
finnad
fir
tir
firiSn
firiSnamam -
firiSnu
firu
fiss
fin
fiur
fiurt
fiechod
page
33, 136
9g
15
107
15
4O
46
IlS
36
37
140
81
136
35, 46
48
19,
98
39
34
15
67
15
18
- 45
45
- 45
18
33
15, 23
140
- 19
fleuchud
fo
fochell
fo-chdtoir
f6cre
fochraicc
fo.daim
fodil
foditin
.fodlat
fo.fera
foglaimm
foglitnthid
foich
.foichiurr
foich|eoir
foide
foflenu
foil.se
.foima/
fofndel
foirl»the
foirethi
.foisitis
fi,llus
fo-16
fol'l:-hnide
ri,nus (do)
fol"
forl,aide
forcanti
forcuimset
fordmid
fort ,gaire
fortacht
for-tdt
forthacht
fota
page
19
49, 118
40
119
IlS
ll9
19
12
119
40
40
139
40
12
139
17
118
87
81
4
77
42
81
ll9
87
87
107
117
4
30, 119
119
119
- 3
fraig
freecor
frccndairc
frecre
frega
fregre
fi'cseaehtar -
fresesiu
fridoirced
fris-air
frith (fo)
frith
fi'ithoreon
filait
-ffiairc
fudumain
fudmm'ui
fugall
fugell
fuit (do)
-fui
fulach
fur-aithmintêr
gaba (fo) l
gabil l
gfid -
-g;tde
gaimred
gais -
gaith -
gai -
gé
page
.31
II
4, | 0
31
1o0
10
120
10
10
10
1"20
10
118
44, 118
44
13
13
IOï,
77
88
119
106
12
30
86
86
21, 40
39
39
87
17
77
180
-géba
géba (fo)
gebtit
gega (do) -
-gegrann (fo)-
"géna
genitiu
-gess
gessa
gessi
-glas
glenamon
glenn
-glmm
glinne
gnfis
gmifl
gnethe
-gniu (do)
gobae
-gde
oi
-goit.
gotho
gnid
FI
grhn
grega
greim (ad) -
greim (in)
grés (do)
guide -
guirid
guth -
I
iaeh
page
80
106
54
80
84
80
37
76
76
87
88
38
86
38
39
14, '2.1
87
18
37
86
17
86
3'2.
139
31
14
31
1:23
123
138
30
21
32
34
page
iar 121
iarm- - 121
iarma.foieh - 122
iarmi-foig - 122
iarmua 121
iarmuidigthe 121
/ami - 20
iarsind i 132
iartain 137
far-thuaiscerddach 121
iarum - 13 7
ibid 15, 22
ic (ar) 113
icht 86
idhart 112
idib 1 O1
il 45
illei 59
iml) (noun) - 22
iml) (verb) 104
iml) (prep.) - 122
imhechtrach - 12"2
imbide 12"2
imbliu 22
ira brfidub 1:22
imchSinti 122
immalle 138
immallei 138
immauetar 13s
immenetor 138
imme-rfidi 122
immolang 5
imnmlngi 118
immurgu - 135
imued 19
imniud 19
iml) 10.t
impfid 20, 122
m-nidi
ilnthrénugud
m (interrog.)
m (prep.)
lllainl
inchosc
in(1
llldll
lll(]as
i d:u'be
ndatae
-in(let (as)
ind6
mdechtso
mdib
indip
indixnigedar
m-dlung
mdocbS1
indorsa
indossa
mdred
infechtsa
luge -
mgen (' hall')
mgen (' dmhter')
lngt
migena
mis
imfid
llllli
nmocht
lllllOllll
ln-otgat
qnotsat
lllSe
lllill
41,
1S1
page
1"22
122
56
123
lo
123
123
25
9S
123
98
117
137
137
104
105
123
123
137
137
123
137
136
23
123
41
123
30
D
137
137
137
59
107
81
3O
57
illSO
insuidigthe
in tain
intamil
in tan
inti
intremdid
intsamil
iorr-
if
iriu
irlam
Matou
1s
is (verb)
is (conj.)
/sel
lSill
isiu
issa
issat
issid
issum
issum
it
itSu
ithall
itius
kalde
la
-ltl,rastar
20,
page
123
131
123
131
26
137
81
37
45
45
101
131
43
26
26
54
53
53
53
54
39
101
98
_'26
124
83
182
laigiu
hiir
hiiréne
htitu,)ir
la-se
lat
|athe
le
lcl)lang
lcl)or
.loe
legt (do)
légaid
léiciub
ldilm
|Cllmloll
leth
leth (' hal.f')
lethan
lethe
léu
li
|utc
]iathritae
|ie
ligid
-lil
-lili
lin
lingid
lit"
loathar
loclmd
|oche
1,',cher
-lod
page
3`6
40
40
3`O
131
53
29
17
139
81
139
33
38
3`9
"22
38
15
139
33`
85
80
15
85
45
77
35
15
36
85
-lodmar
longid (fo)
-lotar
1,thor
1/md
lùaith
lfiaithred
lfibgart6ir
luch
Lugaid
hlg]»tlrt
lugu
m, nla (çoj.)
Ill ('0/).) -
111111
III ;X (2 C
mad
lllg"
maige
mailgih
mainba
mMubad
maith
màl
nlalae
mahlacht
mallacht
manid
.qu[n]
marcfr
page
20
83
20
15
3`0
40
40
35
33`
46
13`
133
46
46
3, 13
3`7
104
3
38
34
103
104
44
14
33 .
11
11
133
18
45
15
lO
183
page
masu 7, 101
mat 104
m«ithir 14, 3,q
matin 137
matis 104
md 49
mebuir 13 fl
mebul 139
medg "22
méit 30, 137
melid 24
mem 82
menmae o
menmuin 13
mesar ] 39
mess 32
messa 46
messe 49
messi -
mestar 77
met 6
mi 13, 39
raid 21
midar 5
-midethar (ad) 112
mil 15
mil 35
Milcon 37
toile 47
mfled 35
Miliuce 37
mind 32
mis 39
mitter 10
mm 23
nmi 30
mo (poss. 1»'on.) 50
md 46
nl;anl
moch
m,;ir
moiti
-molastar
m6r
m6r-chenn
m6r-feser
mdrthae
lllOS-
mrath
mrccht
mrechtrad
mruig
mucc
m g
roui
nlllicc
llltlCCe
inuir
lnuisse
muirm6ru
Mumu
N
naeea
nacce
nach (pron.)-
n:ieh
nacha (pron.)
nach tan
nfid (wg)
nad (top.)
nade
Fage
4(;
138
45
54
83
45
42
49
42
40
40
16
33
16
0
33
33
31
5O
139
37
62
104
63
63
63
5
62
59
131
57, 62
- 62
184
imdip
naicc
niddm
naip
nmae
I1/11
Ilall(l
uandat
uani
I111,
mit
uatat
late
nathar
nathir
natho
liech
nechtar
neh't
lloEdae
-IlOlll
lleph-icthe
lleS
net
ni (pron)
iii (neg.)
uiad
niae
mb
nibo
niCOli
nig (do)
nhue
ninlfil
page.
104
62
104
36
102
102
102
59
102
50
102
10:2
6:2
50
33
63
58
59
28
39
7
46
46
.38
62
35
55
104
104
62
39
53
n/mth<
-nimis
liio
nioth
uip
nil)tha
nisfil
nita
uitad
nitam
niuil -
no- (preverb)
lloch
ndchu
noidiu
n6mad
n&)l)ar
Ilond
lmndad
lmndan
notire
lltlae
mde
6
6a
bac
oblu
oc
Oo
page.
53
81
3.5
35
104
104
9S
9
101
lol
101
loi
lol
28
61)
131
135
47
47
37
48
49
102
102
40
131
23
12t
lo2
6
6
7
1:26
185
6cb«l
ocCU-l'ol)ae
oehsal
oeht
oehtar
oehtmad
ochtmogo
oemaide
.ocmanatar
ocu.beu
ocu.hether
ocu-]
ocu-hiat
ocuis
oPUS
odl)
,',en-feeht
of (con)
oiged
oigi
-oile (as)
Oil
oinar
oh'dnide
ois
oifiu
ol
ole
oldaas
ohlai
oldStae
oldu
ommrid
page,
-." 124
126
-)
16, 47
49
47
126
1"_'6
126
126
1"6
12;
131
20, 131
17
49
17
39
35
35
124
17, 47
49
3.
42
17
35
61, ] 34
- 43
- 3
98
98
98
- 98
- 138
opad
opair
ol)uir (ad) -
ol'l)e
orc.tlm
,;pe, (h)dre
ordi
-orL
ol'tao
PMt'aicc
penlfit
Itel's,'tll
persine
l.hepid
phiur
p6c
popul
posit
preeept
pl'eeept6ir
ln'edehid
pridehid
prfiu-
R
raeatar (fris)
rainl (a) -
rSith (di) -
page.
12
16
1, 134
13
14, 14,
,7
126
P
39, 139, 140
- 139
30
3O
139
140
31
140
40
139
139
49
49
106
130
130
106
-i'ala
-ralad
-ralsaç
«'trpaar
1"
rdcatar (do) -
reicc
-reilced
reme.uuicsed
rcmi-taat
remsuidigud -
rcnthcchtas -
renMd
relldo
rcsiu
rt, glu
rcthit
ri
riagol
-rlC
FICC
I'lCH
rirai (ad)
rllld
Tir
-1'11"
F1SH
rithc
ro
rob
robo
rochain (for)
-rochMr (do) -
page.
IOG
106
106
106
V5
126
l 06
127
126
126
126
126
126
ll7
6
32
132
37
19
15, 33
15
137
127
127
15
112
32
$5
80
432
63, 64, 65, 127
131
,5
19
rodarcar (ad)
rodbo -
r,;ethach (ad)
rogid -
rogu
roiblang
ro-iccu -
roichan (for)
rochan
-rochechuatar
-ro-g
ro/granu (in)
"l'Oigl'&llll
rofgu (do)
roisc (cou)
-roilli (as)
rob
rol«ad
-rolad
rolsg
FOlll
roqiM *
rombia
romdis
FOIlISP
Fouirai"
rondgal)
ro-61ach
rop
ropo
ro-saig
-rorthatar
-r6tacht
roth
rothuusa (do)
ro.ucad
rfiad
rnaldatar (in)
page.
106
131
5
23
39
127
13
127
14-
4
0
77
112
106
106
106
106
103
127
100
lo2
103
103
105
127
104
104
85
21
107
127
15
rubart (as)
S
page.
127
16
26
- 139
59
139
44
l-4
18, 34
34
59
14
15
40
5O
54
59
23
131
28
7
21
139
5
47
61, 127
134
104
21
12
sechmo-
seehlno-ella -
sec'ht
scehtae
sechtair
sechtmal
sechtmogo
sechtmogat
secnd-
séde
seiche
seir
sciss
séitehe
sel
selb
selg
semtdir
sellosLer
seYçe
scrcae
scrnaid
serr
Sessed
scsser
-set
sethar
sethar (pro»r)
sétig
si
s/ans
|27
2|, 47
- 49
::6, t7
47
49
35
»1
49
23
4O
140
4
3
12
7g
49
50
49
t6
46
15
188
sar
side
sieir
-sil
sin
slnill
Sllllli
SIl"
Sl.qi
SlSlli
Slssi
$1II
;I 11111
1111"
sim',,at
slaidid
slSntu -
slecht -
déibe -
sleBlOn
sl¢ab
dig (ad)
slige
snechte
SII
snni
Slllsni
sn/the
80 SP
so-chenefiil
sochumach -
sochmach
sodain
.oilse
soirb
soirbem
page.
5'.)
49
57
49
46
59
49
49
49
- 49
13, 18, 38
41)
8l
39
86
39
23
"2"2, 38
88
88
23
49
49
49
S7
26
42
19
19
59
30
45
45
soirl »ithir
soirfed
SO I11
0111111&illlenl -
SOlllIlle
S(tll
sonail'l
sonaraidir
so-nir
SOl'Il
soscélae
srethi
srlan
Sl'(tll
srogdl
sruth
stoir
al&Il
sflanmn
sflas
sude
sui
suide
suide (pron.)
sfiil
Stllld
superlait
suthain -
sut.hainidir
T
"tS.
tabart
tacco
taccu
tai
page,
45
18
49
45
45
49
45
45
42
140
12
140
15
140
16
31, 139
15
37
59
16
35
21
57
31
28
59
31
45
45
98
151
63
63
50
189
tai
taige
tair -
tairmchosal -
tairmt, hecht -
tairse -
tairsiu
talam
tall
-talla
tahnaidiu
tiuaic
t.,naise
tane
tanu
tar -
tapais
.tal'at
tarb -
tarmi-berar- -
tarreheE
tare
tthunn -
tt, hus
t;ithut
-t«iu
-té
té
tee
tcccomnocuir
tech -
techtaire
techtaite -
tecmongat -
tecnate -
tecosc -
teg
teglach
page.
3
3
59
128
37
26, 59
137
5
4
15
45
12,
128
12
113
15
54
54
54
17
13
44
o.) 44
107
38
40
71
107
10
123
- 21
-
.tC.,«ot
teilciud
teist
telt
.tella
Tentait
Tenlrach
rI'Pllll" 0
tcne
tengae
teoir
teora
-terga
tert-
tess
tessim
testa
testimin
tiach
tiag
.tiagat
trac
tasu
t'astair
tihéra
tic
tig
tinchosc
tindarscan
.tinib
-tila
tfl'that
tis
tlenamon
to
toead
page.
15
77
12s
16
41
32
32
32
35
31
48
128
49
59
117
117
31
74
15
59
76
76
128
12
127
77
12,q
40
59
8
12$, 129
12s
-
190
t6cb;il
toceth
t.oehmare
.todsat
t,;eth (do)
to[tmn
togu
toimseo
toimtiu
toseeh
tomnibther -
tmgid
topur
-torehar
-torehair
t6rmaeh
tol'thissem
tosge
tossaeh
tossueh (adv.)
-toth -
tothaim
-totsag
trA
traig
tre (prep.)
tfCe
tremdid
tremi-
tvemi-berar -
trél
tves
tt-essa
tressam
tri
tri (p'e)
triar
trian
page.
124
13
128
107
1o7
39
16, 19
36, 88
17
6S
12.5
107
19, l(ff
107
2S, 125
138
107
12
107
- 133
34
129
139
129
12
46
4
46
46
21. 47
129
49
- 49
trieha
trichatmad
triphne
Tvinddit
tris
triuss
troeh
tronlm
tr(I
tfiaid
tI'UIIlIIIll
tU
-tfiail'e
tfialang
tuargab
trias
tflasulcud
tfiatae
tfiath
tfiatha
tuirem
.tuisim
tuit (do)
-tuiter
-tultatar
tussu
U
(h)fla-bla
flad-ffalichthe
flaisli
flaislimen
fiaithed
flar
(h)fiare (conj.)
page
36, 47
48
) .)
139
49
41
:»2
45
?,2
7,9
- 45
49
118
41
125
59
124
42
15, 30
18
19
125
107
i07
85
49
132
- 125
125
- 43
- 45
- 13
15
134
126
fiasa!
imsa|-ahir
flasllm
fiathad
llCCll
ucut
ugae
uf
191
43 uilc
34 uile
126 ungae
13, 49 ulcu
39
39
17 ymmon
39
Y
page.
43
43
| 3, 30, 139
4
Belfa«t : ALEX. M.VNE & BORD. Printers to the Queen's University of I,elfast.
PB 1223 .036 1912 SMC
O'Connell, Frederick William
A grammar of Old Irish
